Перевод: со всех языков на английский

С английского на:
Все языки
Со всех языков на:
Все языки
Английский
Немецкий
Русский

speak common Greek

1 Ἑλληνίζω

Ἑλλην-ίζω, [tense] impf. ἑλλήνιζον without augm., Charito 4.5 codd.: [tense] aor. [voice] Act.

A ἑλληνίσαι D.C.55.3
: [tense] aor. [voice] Pass. without augm., Th.2.68 codd.: [tense] pf. [voice] Pass. ἡλλήνισται J.AJ1.6.1
:— speak Greek, Ἕλλην μέν ἐστι καὶ ἑλληνίζει Pl.Men. 82b
, cf. Chrm. 159a, Prt. 328a, etc.; ἑ. τῇ φωνῇ, τὴν φωνήν, Aeschin.3.172, Charito l.c.; esp. speak or write pure or correct Greek, Arist.Rh. 1407a19, D.H.Pomp.2.5; ἄκρως ἑ. S.E.M.1.186; opp. βαρβαρίζω, ib. 246.

b οὐδὲ γὰρ ἂν ἑλληνίζοι οὕτως τὸ ἐρώτημα λεχθέν would not be Greek, Arist.SE 182a34.

c speak common Greek, opp. the Attic dialect, σὺ μὲν ἀττικίζεις.. οἱ δ' Ἕλληνες ἑλληνίζομεν Posidipp.28
.

II trans., make Greek, Hellenize, τὴν βάρβαρον Lib.Or.11.103
; translate into Greek, D.C. l.c.:—[voice] Pass., ἑλληνισθῆναι τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπό τινος acquire the Greek language from.., Th. l.c.; τὰ ὀνόματα.. ἡλλήνισται have assumed an Hellenic form, J.AJ1.6.1.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > Ἑλληνίζω
2 de

de [də]

━━━━━━━━━

1. preposition

2. article

━━━━━━━━━

1. <

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► de + le = du ; de + les = des ; de becomes d' before a vowel or silent h.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque de fait partie d'une locution du type décider de, content de, de plus en plus, reportez-vous à l'autre mot.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

   a. (provenance) from

• s'échapper de to escape from

• il arrive du Japon he has just arrived from Japan

• nous recevons des amis du Canada we've got friends from Canada staying with us

• l'avion de Londres the plane from London

• je l'ai vu en sortant de la maison I saw him as I was coming out of the house

   b. (lieu) in

• les magasins de Londres the shops in London

• les voisins du 2^e étage the neighbours on the 2nd floor

   c. (destination) to

• l'avion de Bruxelles the plane to Brussels

• la route de Tours the road to Tours

   d. (appartenance) of

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque de sert à exprimer l'appartenance, il se traduit par of ; on préférera toutefois souvent le génitif lorsque le possesseur est une personne ou un animal.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• les oreilles du lapin the rabbit's ears

• la maison de David David's house

• la maison de notre ami our friend's house

• un ami de la famille a friend of the family

• un ami de mon père a friend of my father's

• la porte de la maison the door of the house

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Après un pluriel se terminant par un s, l'apostrophe s'utilise sans s.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• la maison de nos amis our friends' house

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► On ajoute cependant le 's après un nom commun se terminant par ss.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• la loge de l'actrice the actress's dressing-room

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Dans le cas où le possesseur est une chose, l'anglais supprime parfois le 's.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• le pied de la table the table leg

• le bouton de la porte the door knob

• les romanciers du 20^e siècle 20th-century novelists

   e. (contenu) of

• une bouteille de vin a bottle of wine

• une pincée de sel a pinch of salt

• une collection de timbres a collection of stamps

   f. (matière)

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► En anglais, un nom en apposition sert souvent à décrire la matière dont quelque chose est fait.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• un vase de cristal a crystal vase

• une table de chêne an oak table

   g. (qualité) un homme de goût a man of taste

• quelque chose de beau something lovely

• rien d'intéressant nothing interesting

   h. (agent) by

• un film de Fellini a Fellini film

• un concerto de Brahms a concerto by Brahms

• c'est de qui ? who is it by?

• ce poème n'est pas de moi I didn't write the poem

   i. ( = avec)

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque de signifie avec, au moyen de, à l'aide de, ou exprime la manière ou la cause, la traduction dépend du contexte ; reportez-vous à l'autre mot.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• il l'attrapa de la main gauche he caught it with his left hand

• marcher d'un pas lent to walk slowly

• rougir de honte to go red with embarrassment

• être fatigué de répéter to be tired of repeating

• couvert de boue covered in mud

   j. ( = par) il gagne 30 € de l'heure he earns 30 euros an hour

   k. ( = durant) de jour during the day

• de nuit during the night

• 3 heures du matin 3 o'clock in the morning

• je ne l'ai pas vu de la soirée I haven't seen him all evening

   l. (locutions) il y a deux verres de cassés there are two broken glasses

• j'ai une semaine de congé I've got a week's holiday

• il est d'une bêtise ! he's so stupid!

• tu as de ces idées ! you have the strangest ideas!

• le jour de Noël Christmas Day

• cette saleté de temps this rotten weather

• la ville de Paris the city of Paris

• le mois de juin the month of June

• une pièce de 6 m² a room 6 metres square

• un enfant de 5 ans a 5-year-old child

• un voyage de trois jours a three-day journey

• il y aura une attente de quelques heures you will have to wait a few hours

• un chèque de 100 € a cheque for 100 euros

• il est professeur d'anglais he's an English teacher

► de... à from... to

• de chez moi à la gare, il y a 5 km it's 5km from my house to the station

• du 2 au 7 mai from 2 to 7 May

• les enfants de 9 à 12 ans children from 9 to 12► de... en from... to

• il va de village en village he goes from village to village

• de jour en jour from day to day

• le nombre diminue d'année en année the number is decreasing every year

• nous allions de surprise en surprise we had one surprise after another

2. <

   a. (affirmation)

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► L'article de n'est souvent pas traduit mais il peut parfois être rendu par some.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• au déjeuner, nous avons eu du poulet we had chicken for lunch

• j'ai du travail à faire I've got work to do

• j'ai des voisins charmants I've got lovely neighbours

• boire de l'eau to drink water

• ils vendent des pommes they sell apples

• il mange des biscuits toute la journée he eats biscuits all day

• elle a de jolies mains she's got lovely hands

• il portait des lunettes he was wearing glasses

• il a joué du Chopin he played Chopin

• cela demande de la patience it takes patience

• c'est du vol ! that's robbery!

• j'ai acheté des pommes I bought some apples

   b. (interrogation, hypothèse)

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Dans les questions et les hypothèses, de soit ne se traduit pas, soit est rendu par any ou some.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• accepteriez-vous de l'argent liquide ? would you take cash?

• as-tu de l'argent ? have you got any money?

• as-tu rencontré des randonneurs ? did you meet any hikers?

• si tu achètes du vin, j'en prendrai aussi if you buy some wine, I'll buy some too

• s'il y a des problèmes if there are any problems

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Dans les offres polies, on utilise plus souvent some.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• tu veux de l'aide ? do you want any help? ; (plus poli) would you like some help?

• voulez-vous des œufs ? would you like some eggs?

• vous ne voulez vraiment pas de vin ? are you sure you don't want some wine?

   c. ► pas... de... not any... no...

• je n'ai pas acheté de pommes I didn't buy any apples

• je n'ai pas de voisins I haven't got any neighbours

• il n'y a pas de pain there isn't any bread there's no bread

* * *

(d' before vowel or mute h) də, d préposition

1) ( indiquant l'origine) from

le train de Bruxelles — the train from Brussels

il arrive du Japon — he's just come from Japan

à 20 mètres de là — 20 metres [BrE] from there

un enfant de mon premier mari — a child by my first husband

un vin de Grèce — ( rapporté de là-bas) a wine from Greece; ( fait là-bas) a Greek wine

né de parents immigrés — born of immigrant parents

il est de père italien — his father is Italian

de méfiant il est devenu paranoïaque — he went from being suspicious to being paranoid

2) ( indiquant la progression)

de...à, de...en — from...to

de 8 à 10 heures — from 8 to 10 (o'clock)

du matin au soir — from morning till night

d'heure en heure — from hour to hour

3) ( indiquant la destination) to

4) ( indiquant la cause)

mourir de soif — to die of thirst

pleurer de rage — to cry with rage

trembler de froid — to shiver with cold

5) ( indiquant la manière) in

parler d'un ton monocorde — to speak in a monotone

tirer de toutes ses forces — to pull with all one's might

6) ( indiquant le moyen) with

pousser quelque chose du pied — to push something aside with one's foot

vivre de saucisses — to live on sausages

7) ( indiquant l'agent) by

un poème de Victor Hugo — a poem by Victor Hugo

avoir un enfant de quelqu'un — to have a child by somebody

8) ( indiquant la durée)

travailler de nuit/de jour — to work at night/during the day

ne rien faire de la journée — to do nothing all day

9) (indiquant l'appartenance, la dépendance)

les chapeaux de Paul — Paul's hats

un élève du professeur Talbin — one of professor Talbin's students

l'immensité de la mer — the immensity of the sea

le toit de la maison — the roof of the house

la porte de la chambre — the bedroom door

le cadran du téléphone — the dial on the telephone

c'est bien de lui — it's just like him

10) ( détermination par le contenant)

le foin de la grange — the hay in the barn

le vin du tonneau — ( qui s'y trouve) the wine in the barrel; ( qu'on a tiré) the wine from the barrel

11) ( détermination par le contenu) of

une tasse de café — a cup of coffee

12) ( détermination par la quantité) of

une minute de silence — one minute of silence, a minute's silence

13) ( détermination par le lieu) of

les pyramides d'Égypte — the pyramids of Egypt

14) ( détermination par le temps) of

le 20 du mois — the 20th of the month

la réunion de samedi — Saturday's meeting

la réunion du 20 juin — the meeting on 20 June

le train de 15 heures — the 3 o'clock train

les ventes de juin — the June sales

15) (détermination par la dimension, la mesure)

un livre de 200 pages — a 200-page book

être long de 20 mètres — to be 20 metres [BrE] long

7 euros de l'heure — 7 euros an hour

trop lourd de trois kilos — three kilos too heavy

16) (détermination par la nature, fonction, matière)

un billet de train — a train ticket

une robe de coton rouge — a red cotton dress

une bulle d'air — an air bubble

17) ( apposition) of

le mois de juillet — the month of July

le nom de Flore — the name Flore

18) ( avec attribut du nom ou du pronom)

trois personnes de tuées — three people killed

deux heures de libres — two hours free

20 euros de plus — 20 euros more

l'ourlet a deux centimètres de trop — the hem is two centimetres [BrE] too long

quelque chose/rien de nouveau — something/nothing new

c'est quelqu'un de célèbre — he's/she's famous

c'est ça de fait — (colloq) that's that out of the way

19) ( avec un infinitif)

ça me peinait de la voir ainsi — it upset me to see her like that

et eux de rire — and they laughed

20) ( après un déverbal)

le filtrage de l'eau pose de gros problèmes — filtering water poses big problems

21) ( après un superlatif) gén of; ( avec un lieu ou ensemble assimilé) in

le plus grand restaurant de la ville — the biggest restaurant in the town

22) (colloq) (en corrélation avec le pronom un, une)

pour une gaffe, c'en est une, de gaffe! — as blunders go, that was a real one!

23) ( dans une comparaison chiffrée) than

plus/moins de 10 — more/less than 10

••

La préposition

Certains emplois de la préposition de sont traités ailleurs dans le dictionnaire, notamment

lorsque de introduit le complément de verbes transitifs indirects comme douter de, jouer de, de verbes à double complément comme recevoir quelque chose de quelqu'un, de certains noms comme désir de, obligation de, de certains adjectifs comme fier de, plein de

lorsque de fait partie de locutions comme d'abord, de travers ou de composés comme chemin de fer, pomme de terre

lorsque de est utilisé dans la structure de déterminants indéfinis comme peu de, moins de etc

lorsque de fait suite à être dans certaines tournures être I

D'autres renvois essentiels apparaissent dans l'entrée ci-dessous, mais on se reportera également aux notes d'usage répertoriées pour certaines constructions

L'article indéfini

de article indéfini pluriel est traité avec un I

L'article partitif: de, de l', de la, du

Lorsqu'il exprime une généralité non quantifiée ou une alternative, de, article partitif ne se traduit pas: manger de la viande/du lapin/des oeufs = to eat meat/rabbit/eggs; il ne boit jamais de vin = he never drinks wine; tu prends du café au petit déjeuner? = do you have coffee for breakfast?; voulez-vous de la bière ou du vin? = would you like beer or wine?; il ne veut pas de vin mais de la bière = he doesn't want wine, he wants beer

Lorsque l'idée de quantité est présente il se traduit par some ou any: achète de la bière/des bananes = buy some beer/some bananas; voulez-vous de la bière? = would you like some beer?; évidemment, tu leur as donné de l'argent? = of course, you gave them some money?; y a-t-il du soleil? = is there any sun?; il n'y a pas de soleil = there isn't any sun, there's no sun; il y a rarement du soleil = there's seldom any sun; il n'y a jamais de soleil = there's never any sun; il n'y a plus de vin = there isn't any more wine

Et lorsque qu'il s'agit d'une partie déterminée d'un tout, il se traduit par some of ou any of: elle a mangé des gâteaux que j'ai achetés = she has eaten some of the cakes I bought; a-t-elle bu du vin que j'ai apporté? = did she drink any of the wine I brought?; je ne prendrai plus de ce mélange = I won't take any more of this mixture

* * *
de
1. nm

1) (à jouer) dice

un coup de dés — a throw of the dice

2) (dé à coudre) thimble

2. dés nmpl

1) (= jeu) dice, game of dice

2) CUISINE

couper en dés — to dice

* * *

de ⇒ Note d'usage (d' before vowel or mute h) prép

1 ( indiquant l'origine) from; leur départ/le train de Bruxelles their departure/the train from Brussels; il arrive du Japon he's just come from Japan; de la fenêtre, on peut voir… from the window, one can see…; à 20 mètres de là 20 metres^GB from there; de ce moment fml from that moment; un enfant de mon premier mari/mariage a child by my first husband/from my first marriage; elle est de Taiwan she's from Taiwan; un vin de Grèce ( rapporté de là-bas) a wine from Greece; ( fait là-bas) a Greek wine; né de parents immigrés born of immigrant parents; il est de père italien et de mère chinoise his father is Italian and his mother Chinese; le bébé est de février the baby was born in February; de méfiant il est devenu paranoïaque he went from being suspicious to being paranoid; d'ici là between now and then; d'ici la fin du mois by the end of the month; ⇒ par;

2 ( indiquant la progression) de…à, de…en from…to; de 8 à 10 heures from 8 to 10 (o'clock); de mardi à samedi, du mardi au samedi from Tuesday to Saturday; du matin au soir from morning till night; d'une semaine à l'autre from one week to the next; de Lisbonne à Berlin from Lisbon to Berlin; de l'équateur aux pôles from the equator to the poles; de ville en ville from town to town; d'heure en heure from hour to hour; de déception en désillusion from disappointment to disillusion; ⇒ Charybde, long, moins, moment, place, plus;

3 ( indiquant la destination) to; le train de Paris the train to Paris, the Paris train;

4 ( indiquant la cause) mourir de soif/de chagrin/d'une pneumonie to die of thirst/of a broken heart/of pneumonia; phobie de l'eau/la foule fear of water/crowds; des larmes de désespoir tears of despair; un hurlement de terreur a scream of terror; pleurer de rage to cry with rage; hurler de terreur to scream with terror; trembler de froid to shiver with cold; ⇒ joie;

5 ( indiquant la manière) in; parler d'un ton monocorde to speak in a monotone; s'exprimer de manière élégante to express oneself in an elegant way; plaisanterie d'un goût douteux joke in dubious taste; tirer de toutes ses forces to pull with all one's might; il a répondu d'un geste obscène he answered with an obscene gesture; ⇒ beau, cœur, concert, mémoire, tac, trait;

6 ( indiquant le moyen) with; pousser qch du pied to push sth aside with one's foot; soulever qch d'une main to lift sth with one hand; gravure/graver de la pointe d'un couteau engraving/to engrave with the point of a knife; suspendu des deux mains hanging by two hands; déjeuner/vivre de saucisses et de haricots to lunch/to live on sausages and beans; il a fait de sa chambre un bureau he made his bedroom into a study; ⇒ coup, coude;

7 ( indiquant l'agent) by; un poème/dessin de Victor Hugo a poem/drawing by Victor Hugo; avoir un enfant de qn to have a child by sb; respecté de tous respected by all;

8 ( indiquant la durée) travailler de nuit/de jour to work at night/during the day; ne rien faire de la journée/semaine to do nothing all day/week; de ma vie je n'avais vu ça I had never seen such a thing in my life; ⇒ temps;

9 (indiquant l'appartenance, la dépendance) les chapeaux de Paul/de mon frère/de mes parents Paul's/my brother's/my parents' hats; les oreilles de l'ours/de mon chat the bear's/my cat's ears; la politique de leur gouvernement/de la France their government's/France's policy, the policy of their government/of France; un élève du professeur Talbin one of professor Talbin's students; l'immensité de l'espace/la mer the immensity of space/the sea; le toit de la maison the roof of the house; la porte de la chambre the bedroom door; les rideaux de la chambre sont sales the bedroom curtains are dirty; j'ai lavé les rideaux de la chambre I washed the bedroom curtains; le cadran du téléphone the dial on the telephone; c'est bien de lui it's just like him;

10 ( détermination par le contenant) le foin de la grange the hay in the barn; le vin du tonneau ( qui s'y trouve) the wine in the barrel; ( qu'on a tiré) the wine from the barrel;

11 ( détermination par le contenu) of; une tasse de café a cup of coffee; un sac de charbon a sack of coal;

12 ( détermination par la quantité) of; cinq pages de roman five pages of a novel; deux mètres de tissu two metres^GB of material; trois litres de vin three litres^GB of wine; une minute de silence one minute of silence, a minute's silence; quatre heures de musique four hours of music; deux milliardièmes de seconde two billionths of a second; le quart de mes économies a quarter of my savings; la totalité or l'ensemble de leurs œuvres the whole of their works; les sept maisons du hameau the seven houses of the hamlet;

13 ( détermination par le lieu) of; les pyramides d'Égypte the pyramids of Egypt; le roi de Brunéi the King of Brunei; le premier ministre du Japon the prime minister of Japan, the Japanese prime minister; le comte de Monte-Cristo the Count of Monte-Cristo;

14 ( détermination par le temps) of; les ordinateurs de demain the computers of tomorrow; le 20 du mois the 20th of the month; la réunion de samedi Saturday's meeting; la réunion du 20 juin the meeting on 20 June; le train de 15 heures the 3 o'clock train; les ventes de juin the June sales;

15 (détermination par la dimension, la mesure) un livre de 200 pages a 200-page book; un spectacle de deux heures a two-hour show; une grue de 50 tonnes a 50-tonne crane; être long de 20 mètres, avoir 20 mètres de long to be 20 metres^GB long; 20 euros de l'heure 20 euros an hour; enceinte de trois mois three months' pregnant; on aura deux heures d'attente we'll have a two-hour wait; on aura deux heures de retard we'll be two hours late; trop lourd de trois kilos three kilos too heavy; plus/moins de trois more/less than three; elle est la plus âgée/jeune de deux ans she's the oldest/youngest by two years;

16 (détermination par la nature, fonction, matière) un billet de train a train ticket; une statue de cristal a crystal statue; un livre de géographie a geography book; un professeur de botanique a botany teacher; un chapeau de cow-boy a cowboy hat; une salle de réunion a meeting room; une robe de coton rouge a red cotton dress; une bulle d'air/de savon an air/a soap bubble; un joueur de tennis a tennis player; un produit de qualité a quality product; un travail de qualité quality work; un spécialiste de l'électronique an electronics expert, an expert in electronics; un homme de bon sens a man of common sense; la théorie de la relativité the theory of relativity; ⇒ bois, laine;

17 ( apposition) of; le mois de juillet the month of July; la ville de Singapour the city of Singapore; le titre de duc the title of duke; le nom de Flore the name Flore; le terme de quark the term quark;

18 ( avec attribut du nom ou du pronom) trois personnes de tuées three people killed; une jambe de cassée a broken leg; un seul ticket de valable only one valid ticket; deux heures de libres two hours free; 200 euros de plus 200 euros more; l'ourlet a deux centimètres de trop the hem is two centimetres^GB too long; ton imbécile de frère your stupid brother; quelque chose/rien de nouveau something/nothing new; je n'ai jamais rien vu de semblable I've never seen anything like it; c'est quelqu'un de célèbre he's/she's famous; c'est ça de fait○ that's that out of the way, that's that taken care of;

19 ( avec un infinitif) de la voir ainsi me peinait seeing her like that upset me; ça me peinait de la voir ainsi it upset me to see her like that; et eux/toute la salle de rire and they/the whole audience laughed; être content de faire to be happy to do;

20 ( après un déverbal) le filtrage de l'eau pose de gros problèmes filtering water poses big problems; le remplacement de la chaudière a coûté très cher replacing the boiler was very expensive;

21 ( après un superlatif) gén of; ( avec un lieu ou ensemble assimilé) in; le plus jeune des trois frères the youngest of the three brothers; le roi des rois the king of kings; le plus grand restaurant de la ville the biggest restaurant in the town; le plus vieux de la classe/famille the oldest in the class/family;

22 ○(en corrélation avec le pronom un, une) pour une gaffe, c'en est une, de gaffe! as blunders go, that was a real one!; est-ce que j'en ai une, moi, de voiture? and me, have I got a car?;

23 ( dans une comparaison chiffrée) than; plus/moins de 10 more/less than 10.

[də] (devant voyelle ou 'h' muet d' [d], contraction de 'de' avec 'le' du [dy], contraction de 'de' avec 'les' des [de]) préposition

A.[INDIQUANT L'ORIGINE, LE POINT DE DÉPART]

1. [indiquant la provenance] from

il n'est pas d'ici he's not from (around) here

il a sorti un lapin de son chapeau he produced ou pulled a rabbit out of his hat

2. [à partir de]

de quelques fleurs des champs, elle a fait un bouquet she made a posy out of ou from a few wild flowers

faire un drame de rien to make a fuss over nothing

3. [indiquant l'auteur] by

4. [particule]

Madame de Sévigné Madame de Sévigné

épouser un/une de quelque chose (familier) to marry a man/woman with an aristocratic sounding name

B.[DANS LE TEMPS]

1. [à partir de] from

de ce jour from that day

2. [indiquant le moment]

de jour during the ou by day

travailler de nuit to work nights

il n'a pas travaillé de l'année he hasn't worked all year

je ne le vois pas de la semaine I don't see him at all during the week

le train de 9 h 30 the 9.30 train

[depuis]

de longtemps, on n'avait vu cela such a thing hadn't been seen for a long time

C.[INDIQUANT LA CAUSE]

rougir de plaisir to blush with pleasure

mourir de peur/de faim to die of fright/of hunger

pleurer de joie to cry for joy

souffrir de rhumatismes to suffer from rheumatism

se tordre de douleur/de rire to be doubled up in pain/with laughter

D.[INDIQUANT LE MOYEN, L'INSTRUMENT]

faire signe de la main to wave

il voit mal de l'œil gauche he can't see properly with his left eye

E.[INDIQUANT LA MANIÈRE]

manger de bon appétit to eat heartily

de toutes ses forces with all one's strength

F.[AVEC DES NOMBRES, DES MESURES]

1. [emploi distributif]

50 euros de l'heure 50 euros per ou an hour

2. [introduisant une mesure]

un appartement de 60 m² a 60 m² flat

un homme d'1 m 80 a man who is 1 m 80 tall

une femme de 30 ans a 30-year-old woman

un moteur de 15 chevaux a 15 h.p. engine

un cadeau de 50 euros a gift worth 50 euros

une équipe de 15 personnes a team of 15

3. [indiquant une différence dans le temps, l'espace, la quantité]

distant de cinq kilomètres five kilometres away

ma montre retarde de 10 mn my watch is 10 minutes slow

ce colis est trop lourd de 100 grammes this parcel is 100 grammes too heavy

G.[INDIQUANT L'APPARTENANCE]

la maison de mes parents/Marie my parents'/Marie's house

la porte du salon the living room door

les pays de l'UE the countries in the EU, the EU countries

pour les membres du club for members of the club ou club members

les élèves de sa classe the pupils in his class

H.[MARQUANT LA DÉTERMINATION]

1. [indiquant la matière, la qualité, le genre etc.]

un buffet de chêne an oak dresser

un bonhomme de neige a snowman

une réaction d'horreur a horrified reaction

une pause de publicité a commercial break

un livre d'un grand intérêt a book of great interest

elle est d'un snob! she is so snobbish!, she's such a snob!

2. [indiquant le contenu, le contenant]

l'eau de la citerne the water in the tank

un pot de fleurs

a. [récipient] a flowerpot

b. [fleurs] a pot of flowers

3. [dans un ensemble]

le plus jeune de la classe the youngest pupil in the class

le plus jeune des deux the younger of the two

4. [avec une valeur emphatique]

l'as des as the champ

le fin du fin the very latest thing

I.[SERVANT DE LIEN SYNTAXIQUE]

1. [après un verbe]

parler de quelque chose to speak about ou of something

se séparer de quelqu'un to leave somebody

se libérer du passé to free oneself from the past

instruire quelqu'un de ses intentions to notify somebody of one's plans

ce champ est entouré d'une palissade this field is surrounded by a fence

2. [après un substantif]

l'amour de quelque chose the love of something

troubles de l'audition hearing problems

3. [après un adjectif]

sûr de soi sure of oneself

il est facile de critiquer it's easy to criticize

4. [après un pronom]

rien de nouveau nothing new

quoi de plus beau que la mer? what is more beautiful than the sea?

5. [devant un adjectif, participe ou adverbe]

c'est une heure de perdue that's an hour lost

restez une semaine de plus stay (for) one more ou an extra week

6. [introduisant un nom en apposition]

le mois de janvier the month of January

au mois de janvier in January

cet imbécile de Pierre that idiot Pierre

7. [indiquant le sujet d'un ouvrage]

‘De l'art d'être mère’ ‘The Art of Being a Mother’

8. (littéraire) [introduisant un infinitif]

et tous de rire they all burst into laughter

————————

[də] (devant voyelle ou 'h' muet d' [d], contraction de 'de' avec 'le' du [dy], contraction de 'de' avec 'les' des [de]) article partitif

1. [dans une affirmation]

j'ai acheté de la viande I bought (some) meat

c'est de la provocation/de l'entêtement! it's sheer provocation/pig-headedness!

j'ai bu de ce vin I drank some of that wine

manger de la viande to eat meat

chanter du Fauré to sing some Fauré ou a piece by Fauré

[dans une interrogation]

prends-tu du sucre dans ton café? do you take sugar in your coffee?

[dans une négation]

il n'y a pas de place there's no room, there isn't any room

2. [exprimant une comparaison]

il y a du prophète chez lui he's a bit like a prophet

ça c'est du Julien tout craché ou du pur Julien that's Julien all over, that's typical of Julien

————————

[də] (devant voyelle ou 'h' muet d' [d], contraction de 'de' avec 'le' du [dy], contraction de 'de' avec 'les' des [de]) article défini

[dans une affirmation]

il a de bonnes idées he has ou he's got (some) good ideas

[dans une négation]

nous ne faisons pas de projets pour cet été we are not making any plans for this summer

————————

de... à locution correlative

1. [dans l'espace] from... to

2. [dans le temps] from... to

d'un instant à l'autre

a. [progressivement] from one minute to the next

b. [bientôt] any minute ou time now

d'ici à demain by tomorrow

3. [dans une énumération] from... to

4. [dans une évaluation]

ça vaut de 100 à 150 euros it's worth between 100 and 150 euros

————————

de... en locution correlative

1. [dans l'espace] from... to

2. [dans le temps]

de jour en jour from day to day

l'espoir s'amenuisait d'heure en heure hope dwindled as the hours went by

le nombre d'étudiants augmente d'année en année the number of students is getting bigger by the year ou every year ou from one year to the next

3. [dans une évolution]

de déduction en déduction, il avait trouvé le coupable he'd deduced who the culprit was

aller de déception en déception to go from one disappointment to the next

un musée où vous irez de surprise en surprise a museum where many surprises await you

Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > de

3 dé

de [də]

━━━━━━━━━

1. preposition

2. article

━━━━━━━━━

1. <

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► de + le = du ; de + les = des ; de becomes d' before a vowel or silent h.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque de fait partie d'une locution du type décider de, content de, de plus en plus, reportez-vous à l'autre mot.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

   a. (provenance) from

• s'échapper de to escape from

• il arrive du Japon he has just arrived from Japan

• nous recevons des amis du Canada we've got friends from Canada staying with us

• l'avion de Londres the plane from London

• je l'ai vu en sortant de la maison I saw him as I was coming out of the house

   b. (lieu) in

• les magasins de Londres the shops in London

• les voisins du 2^e étage the neighbours on the 2nd floor

   c. (destination) to

• l'avion de Bruxelles the plane to Brussels

• la route de Tours the road to Tours

   d. (appartenance) of

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque de sert à exprimer l'appartenance, il se traduit par of ; on préférera toutefois souvent le génitif lorsque le possesseur est une personne ou un animal.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• les oreilles du lapin the rabbit's ears

• la maison de David David's house

• la maison de notre ami our friend's house

• un ami de la famille a friend of the family

• un ami de mon père a friend of my father's

• la porte de la maison the door of the house

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Après un pluriel se terminant par un s, l'apostrophe s'utilise sans s.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• la maison de nos amis our friends' house

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► On ajoute cependant le 's après un nom commun se terminant par ss.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• la loge de l'actrice the actress's dressing-room

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Dans le cas où le possesseur est une chose, l'anglais supprime parfois le 's.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• le pied de la table the table leg

• le bouton de la porte the door knob

• les romanciers du 20^e siècle 20th-century novelists

   e. (contenu) of

• une bouteille de vin a bottle of wine

• une pincée de sel a pinch of salt

• une collection de timbres a collection of stamps

   f. (matière)

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► En anglais, un nom en apposition sert souvent à décrire la matière dont quelque chose est fait.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• un vase de cristal a crystal vase

• une table de chêne an oak table

   g. (qualité) un homme de goût a man of taste

• quelque chose de beau something lovely

• rien d'intéressant nothing interesting

   h. (agent) by

• un film de Fellini a Fellini film

• un concerto de Brahms a concerto by Brahms

• c'est de qui ? who is it by?

• ce poème n'est pas de moi I didn't write the poem

   i. ( = avec)

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque de signifie avec, au moyen de, à l'aide de, ou exprime la manière ou la cause, la traduction dépend du contexte ; reportez-vous à l'autre mot.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• il l'attrapa de la main gauche he caught it with his left hand

• marcher d'un pas lent to walk slowly

• rougir de honte to go red with embarrassment

• être fatigué de répéter to be tired of repeating

• couvert de boue covered in mud

   j. ( = par) il gagne 30 € de l'heure he earns 30 euros an hour

   k. ( = durant) de jour during the day

• de nuit during the night

• 3 heures du matin 3 o'clock in the morning

• je ne l'ai pas vu de la soirée I haven't seen him all evening

   l. (locutions) il y a deux verres de cassés there are two broken glasses

• j'ai une semaine de congé I've got a week's holiday

• il est d'une bêtise ! he's so stupid!

• tu as de ces idées ! you have the strangest ideas!

• le jour de Noël Christmas Day

• cette saleté de temps this rotten weather

• la ville de Paris the city of Paris

• le mois de juin the month of June

• une pièce de 6 m² a room 6 metres square

• un enfant de 5 ans a 5-year-old child

• un voyage de trois jours a three-day journey

• il y aura une attente de quelques heures you will have to wait a few hours

• un chèque de 100 € a cheque for 100 euros

• il est professeur d'anglais he's an English teacher

► de... à from... to

• de chez moi à la gare, il y a 5 km it's 5km from my house to the station

• du 2 au 7 mai from 2 to 7 May

• les enfants de 9 à 12 ans children from 9 to 12► de... en from... to

• il va de village en village he goes from village to village

• de jour en jour from day to day

• le nombre diminue d'année en année the number is decreasing every year

• nous allions de surprise en surprise we had one surprise after another

2. <

   a. (affirmation)

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► L'article de n'est souvent pas traduit mais il peut parfois être rendu par some.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• au déjeuner, nous avons eu du poulet we had chicken for lunch

• j'ai du travail à faire I've got work to do

• j'ai des voisins charmants I've got lovely neighbours

• boire de l'eau to drink water

• ils vendent des pommes they sell apples

• il mange des biscuits toute la journée he eats biscuits all day

• elle a de jolies mains she's got lovely hands

• il portait des lunettes he was wearing glasses

• il a joué du Chopin he played Chopin

• cela demande de la patience it takes patience

• c'est du vol ! that's robbery!

• j'ai acheté des pommes I bought some apples

   b. (interrogation, hypothèse)

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Dans les questions et les hypothèses, de soit ne se traduit pas, soit est rendu par any ou some.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• accepteriez-vous de l'argent liquide ? would you take cash?

• as-tu de l'argent ? have you got any money?

• as-tu rencontré des randonneurs ? did you meet any hikers?

• si tu achètes du vin, j'en prendrai aussi if you buy some wine, I'll buy some too

• s'il y a des problèmes if there are any problems

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Dans les offres polies, on utilise plus souvent some.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

• tu veux de l'aide ? do you want any help? ; (plus poli) would you like some help?

• voulez-vous des œufs ? would you like some eggs?

• vous ne voulez vraiment pas de vin ? are you sure you don't want some wine?

   c. ► pas... de... not any... no...

• je n'ai pas acheté de pommes I didn't buy any apples

• je n'ai pas de voisins I haven't got any neighbours

• il n'y a pas de pain there isn't any bread there's no bread

* * *

(d' before vowel or mute h) də, d préposition

1) ( indiquant l'origine) from

le train de Bruxelles — the train from Brussels

il arrive du Japon — he's just come from Japan

à 20 mètres de là — 20 metres [BrE] from there

un enfant de mon premier mari — a child by my first husband

un vin de Grèce — ( rapporté de là-bas) a wine from Greece; ( fait là-bas) a Greek wine

né de parents immigrés — born of immigrant parents

il est de père italien — his father is Italian

de méfiant il est devenu paranoïaque — he went from being suspicious to being paranoid

2) ( indiquant la progression)

de...à, de...en — from...to

de 8 à 10 heures — from 8 to 10 (o'clock)

du matin au soir — from morning till night

d'heure en heure — from hour to hour

3) ( indiquant la destination) to

4) ( indiquant la cause)

mourir de soif — to die of thirst

pleurer de rage — to cry with rage

trembler de froid — to shiver with cold

5) ( indiquant la manière) in

parler d'un ton monocorde — to speak in a monotone

tirer de toutes ses forces — to pull with all one's might

6) ( indiquant le moyen) with

pousser quelque chose du pied — to push something aside with one's foot

vivre de saucisses — to live on sausages

7) ( indiquant l'agent) by

un poème de Victor Hugo — a poem by Victor Hugo

avoir un enfant de quelqu'un — to have a child by somebody

8) ( indiquant la durée)

travailler de nuit/de jour — to work at night/during the day

ne rien faire de la journée — to do nothing all day

9) (indiquant l'appartenance, la dépendance)

les chapeaux de Paul — Paul's hats

un élève du professeur Talbin — one of professor Talbin's students

l'immensité de la mer — the immensity of the sea

le toit de la maison — the roof of the house

la porte de la chambre — the bedroom door

le cadran du téléphone — the dial on the telephone

c'est bien de lui — it's just like him

10) ( détermination par le contenant)

le foin de la grange — the hay in the barn

le vin du tonneau — ( qui s'y trouve) the wine in the barrel; ( qu'on a tiré) the wine from the barrel

11) ( détermination par le contenu) of

une tasse de café — a cup of coffee

12) ( détermination par la quantité) of

une minute de silence — one minute of silence, a minute's silence

13) ( détermination par le lieu) of

les pyramides d'Égypte — the pyramids of Egypt

14) ( détermination par le temps) of

le 20 du mois — the 20th of the month

la réunion de samedi — Saturday's meeting

la réunion du 20 juin — the meeting on 20 June

le train de 15 heures — the 3 o'clock train

les ventes de juin — the June sales

15) (détermination par la dimension, la mesure)

un livre de 200 pages — a 200-page book

être long de 20 mètres — to be 20 metres [BrE] long

7 euros de l'heure — 7 euros an hour

trop lourd de trois kilos — three kilos too heavy

16) (détermination par la nature, fonction, matière)

un billet de train — a train ticket

une robe de coton rouge — a red cotton dress

une bulle d'air — an air bubble

17) ( apposition) of

le mois de juillet — the month of July

le nom de Flore — the name Flore

18) ( avec attribut du nom ou du pronom)

trois personnes de tuées — three people killed

deux heures de libres — two hours free

20 euros de plus — 20 euros more

l'ourlet a deux centimètres de trop — the hem is two centimetres [BrE] too long

quelque chose/rien de nouveau — something/nothing new

c'est quelqu'un de célèbre — he's/she's famous

c'est ça de fait — (colloq) that's that out of the way

19) ( avec un infinitif)

ça me peinait de la voir ainsi — it upset me to see her like that

et eux de rire — and they laughed

20) ( après un déverbal)

le filtrage de l'eau pose de gros problèmes — filtering water poses big problems

21) ( après un superlatif) gén of; ( avec un lieu ou ensemble assimilé) in

le plus grand restaurant de la ville — the biggest restaurant in the town

22) (colloq) (en corrélation avec le pronom un, une)

pour une gaffe, c'en est une, de gaffe! — as blunders go, that was a real one!

23) ( dans une comparaison chiffrée) than

plus/moins de 10 — more/less than 10

••

La préposition

Certains emplois de la préposition de sont traités ailleurs dans le dictionnaire, notamment

lorsque de introduit le complément de verbes transitifs indirects comme douter de, jouer de, de verbes à double complément comme recevoir quelque chose de quelqu'un, de certains noms comme désir de, obligation de, de certains adjectifs comme fier de, plein de

lorsque de fait partie de locutions comme d'abord, de travers ou de composés comme chemin de fer, pomme de terre

lorsque de est utilisé dans la structure de déterminants indéfinis comme peu de, moins de etc

lorsque de fait suite à être dans certaines tournures être I

D'autres renvois essentiels apparaissent dans l'entrée ci-dessous, mais on se reportera également aux notes d'usage répertoriées pour certaines constructions

L'article indéfini

de article indéfini pluriel est traité avec un I

L'article partitif: de, de l', de la, du

Lorsqu'il exprime une généralité non quantifiée ou une alternative, de, article partitif ne se traduit pas: manger de la viande/du lapin/des oeufs = to eat meat/rabbit/eggs; il ne boit jamais de vin = he never drinks wine; tu prends du café au petit déjeuner? = do you have coffee for breakfast?; voulez-vous de la bière ou du vin? = would you like beer or wine?; il ne veut pas de vin mais de la bière = he doesn't want wine, he wants beer

Lorsque l'idée de quantité est présente il se traduit par some ou any: achète de la bière/des bananes = buy some beer/some bananas; voulez-vous de la bière? = would you like some beer?; évidemment, tu leur as donné de l'argent? = of course, you gave them some money?; y a-t-il du soleil? = is there any sun?; il n'y a pas de soleil = there isn't any sun, there's no sun; il y a rarement du soleil = there's seldom any sun; il n'y a jamais de soleil = there's never any sun; il n'y a plus de vin = there isn't any more wine

Et lorsque qu'il s'agit d'une partie déterminée d'un tout, il se traduit par some of ou any of: elle a mangé des gâteaux que j'ai achetés = she has eaten some of the cakes I bought; a-t-elle bu du vin que j'ai apporté? = did she drink any of the wine I brought?; je ne prendrai plus de ce mélange = I won't take any more of this mixture

* * *
de
1. nm

1) (à jouer) dice

un coup de dés — a throw of the dice

2) (dé à coudre) thimble

2. dés nmpl

1) (= jeu) dice, game of dice

2) CUISINE

couper en dés — to dice

* * *

de ⇒ Note d'usage (d' before vowel or mute h) prép

1 ( indiquant l'origine) from; leur départ/le train de Bruxelles their departure/the train from Brussels; il arrive du Japon he's just come from Japan; de la fenêtre, on peut voir… from the window, one can see…; à 20 mètres de là 20 metres^GB from there; de ce moment fml from that moment; un enfant de mon premier mari/mariage a child by my first husband/from my first marriage; elle est de Taiwan she's from Taiwan; un vin de Grèce ( rapporté de là-bas) a wine from Greece; ( fait là-bas) a Greek wine; né de parents immigrés born of immigrant parents; il est de père italien et de mère chinoise his father is Italian and his mother Chinese; le bébé est de février the baby was born in February; de méfiant il est devenu paranoïaque he went from being suspicious to being paranoid; d'ici là between now and then; d'ici la fin du mois by the end of the month; ⇒ par;

2 ( indiquant la progression) de…à, de…en from…to; de 8 à 10 heures from 8 to 10 (o'clock); de mardi à samedi, du mardi au samedi from Tuesday to Saturday; du matin au soir from morning till night; d'une semaine à l'autre from one week to the next; de Lisbonne à Berlin from Lisbon to Berlin; de l'équateur aux pôles from the equator to the poles; de ville en ville from town to town; d'heure en heure from hour to hour; de déception en désillusion from disappointment to disillusion; ⇒ Charybde, long, moins, moment, place, plus;

3 ( indiquant la destination) to; le train de Paris the train to Paris, the Paris train;

4 ( indiquant la cause) mourir de soif/de chagrin/d'une pneumonie to die of thirst/of a broken heart/of pneumonia; phobie de l'eau/la foule fear of water/crowds; des larmes de désespoir tears of despair; un hurlement de terreur a scream of terror; pleurer de rage to cry with rage; hurler de terreur to scream with terror; trembler de froid to shiver with cold; ⇒ joie;

5 ( indiquant la manière) in; parler d'un ton monocorde to speak in a monotone; s'exprimer de manière élégante to express oneself in an elegant way; plaisanterie d'un goût douteux joke in dubious taste; tirer de toutes ses forces to pull with all one's might; il a répondu d'un geste obscène he answered with an obscene gesture; ⇒ beau, cœur, concert, mémoire, tac, trait;

6 ( indiquant le moyen) with; pousser qch du pied to push sth aside with one's foot; soulever qch d'une main to lift sth with one hand; gravure/graver de la pointe d'un couteau engraving/to engrave with the point of a knife; suspendu des deux mains hanging by two hands; déjeuner/vivre de saucisses et de haricots to lunch/to live on sausages and beans; il a fait de sa chambre un bureau he made his bedroom into a study; ⇒ coup, coude;

7 ( indiquant l'agent) by; un poème/dessin de Victor Hugo a poem/drawing by Victor Hugo; avoir un enfant de qn to have a child by sb; respecté de tous respected by all;

8 ( indiquant la durée) travailler de nuit/de jour to work at night/during the day; ne rien faire de la journée/semaine to do nothing all day/week; de ma vie je n'avais vu ça I had never seen such a thing in my life; ⇒ temps;

9 (indiquant l'appartenance, la dépendance) les chapeaux de Paul/de mon frère/de mes parents Paul's/my brother's/my parents' hats; les oreilles de l'ours/de mon chat the bear's/my cat's ears; la politique de leur gouvernement/de la France their government's/France's policy, the policy of their government/of France; un élève du professeur Talbin one of professor Talbin's students; l'immensité de l'espace/la mer the immensity of space/the sea; le toit de la maison the roof of the house; la porte de la chambre the bedroom door; les rideaux de la chambre sont sales the bedroom curtains are dirty; j'ai lavé les rideaux de la chambre I washed the bedroom curtains; le cadran du téléphone the dial on the telephone; c'est bien de lui it's just like him;

10 ( détermination par le contenant) le foin de la grange the hay in the barn; le vin du tonneau ( qui s'y trouve) the wine in the barrel; ( qu'on a tiré) the wine from the barrel;

11 ( détermination par le contenu) of; une tasse de café a cup of coffee; un sac de charbon a sack of coal;

12 ( détermination par la quantité) of; cinq pages de roman five pages of a novel; deux mètres de tissu two metres^GB of material; trois litres de vin three litres^GB of wine; une minute de silence one minute of silence, a minute's silence; quatre heures de musique four hours of music; deux milliardièmes de seconde two billionths of a second; le quart de mes économies a quarter of my savings; la totalité or l'ensemble de leurs œuvres the whole of their works; les sept maisons du hameau the seven houses of the hamlet;

13 ( détermination par le lieu) of; les pyramides d'Égypte the pyramids of Egypt; le roi de Brunéi the King of Brunei; le premier ministre du Japon the prime minister of Japan, the Japanese prime minister; le comte de Monte-Cristo the Count of Monte-Cristo;

14 ( détermination par le temps) of; les ordinateurs de demain the computers of tomorrow; le 20 du mois the 20th of the month; la réunion de samedi Saturday's meeting; la réunion du 20 juin the meeting on 20 June; le train de 15 heures the 3 o'clock train; les ventes de juin the June sales;

15 (détermination par la dimension, la mesure) un livre de 200 pages a 200-page book; un spectacle de deux heures a two-hour show; une grue de 50 tonnes a 50-tonne crane; être long de 20 mètres, avoir 20 mètres de long to be 20 metres^GB long; 20 euros de l'heure 20 euros an hour; enceinte de trois mois three months' pregnant; on aura deux heures d'attente we'll have a two-hour wait; on aura deux heures de retard we'll be two hours late; trop lourd de trois kilos three kilos too heavy; plus/moins de trois more/less than three; elle est la plus âgée/jeune de deux ans she's the oldest/youngest by two years;

16 (détermination par la nature, fonction, matière) un billet de train a train ticket; une statue de cristal a crystal statue; un livre de géographie a geography book; un professeur de botanique a botany teacher; un chapeau de cow-boy a cowboy hat; une salle de réunion a meeting room; une robe de coton rouge a red cotton dress; une bulle d'air/de savon an air/a soap bubble; un joueur de tennis a tennis player; un produit de qualité a quality product; un travail de qualité quality work; un spécialiste de l'électronique an electronics expert, an expert in electronics; un homme de bon sens a man of common sense; la théorie de la relativité the theory of relativity; ⇒ bois, laine;

17 ( apposition) of; le mois de juillet the month of July; la ville de Singapour the city of Singapore; le titre de duc the title of duke; le nom de Flore the name Flore; le terme de quark the term quark;

18 ( avec attribut du nom ou du pronom) trois personnes de tuées three people killed; une jambe de cassée a broken leg; un seul ticket de valable only one valid ticket; deux heures de libres two hours free; 200 euros de plus 200 euros more; l'ourlet a deux centimètres de trop the hem is two centimetres^GB too long; ton imbécile de frère your stupid brother; quelque chose/rien de nouveau something/nothing new; je n'ai jamais rien vu de semblable I've never seen anything like it; c'est quelqu'un de célèbre he's/she's famous; c'est ça de fait○ that's that out of the way, that's that taken care of;

19 ( avec un infinitif) de la voir ainsi me peinait seeing her like that upset me; ça me peinait de la voir ainsi it upset me to see her like that; et eux/toute la salle de rire and they/the whole audience laughed; être content de faire to be happy to do;

20 ( après un déverbal) le filtrage de l'eau pose de gros problèmes filtering water poses big problems; le remplacement de la chaudière a coûté très cher replacing the boiler was very expensive;

21 ( après un superlatif) gén of; ( avec un lieu ou ensemble assimilé) in; le plus jeune des trois frères the youngest of the three brothers; le roi des rois the king of kings; le plus grand restaurant de la ville the biggest restaurant in the town; le plus vieux de la classe/famille the oldest in the class/family;

22 ○(en corrélation avec le pronom un, une) pour une gaffe, c'en est une, de gaffe! as blunders go, that was a real one!; est-ce que j'en ai une, moi, de voiture? and me, have I got a car?;

23 ( dans une comparaison chiffrée) than; plus/moins de 10 more/less than 10.

[de] nom masculin

1. JEUX die

des dés dice

jouer aux dés to play dice

coup de dé ou dés throw of the dice

jouer quelque chose sur un coup de dés to gamble something away

les dés (en) sont jetés the die is cast

2. CUISINE cube

couper du lard en dés to dice bacon

3. COUTURE

dé (à coudre) thimble

je prendrai un dé à coudre de cognac I'll have a tiny glass of cognac

Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > dé

4 Alius

1.
Ālĭus (better Ālĕus), a, um, adj., = Elius (v. Alis and Elis), Elian; subst., a native of Elis, a town in Achaia (only a few times in Plaut. Capt.):
postquam belligerant Aetoli cum Aleis,
Plaut. Capt. prol. 24; 27; 2, 2, 30.
2.
ălĭus, a, ud, adj. and subst. (old form, alis, alid, after the analogy of quis, quid:
alis rare,
Cat. 66, 28; Sall. ap. Charis, 2, p. 133; Inscr. Orell. 2488:
alid more freq.,
Lucr. 1, 263; 5, 257; 5, 1305; 5, 1456; Cat. 29, 15; cf. Prisc. 13, p. 959.— Gen. sing. masc.: alius, rare, and not used by Tac.; for which alterius is com. used (v. alter); also alii, Cato and Licin. ap. Prisc. 194 P.; Varr. R. R. 1, 2.— Fem. gen.:
aliae,
Lucr. 3, 918; Cic. Div. 2, 13, 30; Liv. 24, 27, 8; Gell. 2, 28, 1; Capito ap. Gell. 4, 10, 8.— Masc. dat.:
ali,
Lucr. 6, 1226:
alio,
Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 13. — Fem. dat.:
aliae,
Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 207; Gell. 9, 4, 8) [cf. allos; Osc. allo ( nom. sing. fem.); Goth. alis; Erse, aile; O. H. Germ. alles, elles ( conj.); Engl. else], another, [p. 90] other (i. e. of many, whereas alter is one of two, v. exceptt. under II. G.); freq. with the indef. pronn. aliquis, quis, aliqui, qui, quidam, and the interrog. quis, qui, etc.
I.
A.. In gen.:
eorum sectam sequuntur multi mortales... multi alii ex Troja strenui viri,
Naev. Bell. Pun. 1, 16:
alios multos,
Vulg. Matt. 15, 30; ib. Marc. 7, 4:
plures alios,
ib. ib. 12, 5:
cum aliis pluribus,
ib. Act. 15, 35:
an ita dissolvit, ut omnes alii dissolverunt?
Cic. Font. 1; Tac. H. 5, 5:
dum aliud aliquid flagiti conficiat,
Ter. Phorm. 5, 2, 5:
nec nobis praeter med alius quisquam est servos Sosia,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 244:
nec quisquam alius affuit,
id. ib. 1, 1, 269:
panem vel aliud quidquam,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 3, 35. utrum hanc actionem habebis an aliam quampiam; Cic. Caecin. 37:
quidquid aliud dare,
Vulg. Lev. 22, 25:
ALIS NE POTESTO,
Inscr. Orell. 2488:
datum Mi esse ab dis aliis,
Plaut. Am. prol. 12:
adulescentulo in alio occupato amore,
Ter. And. 5, 1, 10:
aut aliae cujus desiderium insideat rei,
Lucr. 3, 918:
ne quam aliam quaerat copiam,
Ter. Heaut. 5, 1, 54:
nisi quid pater ait aliud,
id. And. 5, 4, 47:
si verum est, Q. Fabium Labeonem seu quem alium arbitrum a senatu datum, etc.,
Cic. Off. 1, 10, 33:
quodcumque alid auget,
Lucr. 5, 257:
Est alius quidam, parasitaster paululus,
Ter. Ad. 5. 2, 4; so Vulg. Luc. 22, 59:
tuo (judicio) stabis, si aliud quoddam est tuum,
Cic. Or. 71, 237:
L. Aemilius alius vir erat,
Liv. 44, 18:
Genus ecce aliud discriminis audi,
Juv. 12, 24:
alius, ne condemnaretur, pecuniam dedit,
Cic. Verr. 5, 117; Tac. Agr. 39:
nemo alius,
Cic. Pis. 94; Vulg. Joan. 15, 24:
alius nemo,
Cic. Quinct. 76:
plus alimenti est in pane quam in ullo alio,
Cels. 2, 18:
aliud esse causae suspicamur,
Cic. Fl. 39:
Anne aliud tunc praefecti?
Juv. 4, 78:
estne viris reliqui aliud,
Sall. Fragm. 187, 19:
aliud auxilii,
Tac. A. 5, 8:
aliud subsidii,
id. ib. 12, 46:
alia honorum,
id. ib. 1, 9:
alia sumptuum,
id. ib. 15, 15:
sunt alia quae magis timeam,
Cic. Phil. 5, 29: Facete is quidem, sicut alia, many other things, id. Fin. 1, 3, 7 Madv.:
haec aliaque,
Tac. H. 3, 51 al. —
Hence, alio die, t. t. of the soothsayer, when he wished the Comitia postponed to another day, on the pretence of unfavorable omens: quid gravius quam rem susceptam dirimi, si unus augur alio die dixerit?
Cic. Leg. 2, 12, 31; id. Phil. 2, 33, 83 and 84 Wernsd. Perh. there is a reference to the same thing in Plaut. Poen. 2, 52: ita res divina mihi fuit: res serias omnes extollo ex hoc die in alium diem.—With aliquis, quisquam, or ullus implied (cf. aliqui, V. B., and aliquis, II. B.):
ut, etiam si aliud melius fuit, tamen legatorum reditum exspectetis,
Cic. Phil. 6, 6:
utar post alio, si invenero melius,
something else, id. Tusc. 1, 7, 14; so,
si in aliud tempus differetur,
Caes. B C. 1, 86:
an alium exspectamus?
Vulg. Matt. 11, 3; ib. Marc. 4, 36:
siti magis quam alia re accenditur,
Sall. J. 89, 5:
neque sex legiones alia de causa missas in Hispaniam,
Caes. B. C. 1, 85:
neque creatura alia poterit nos separare,
Vulg. Rom. 8, 39.
► Instances of the rare gen.
alius:
alius generis bestiae,
Cic. N. D. 2, 48, 123; Varr. L. L. 9, 40, 67 dub.:
alius ingenii,
Liv. 1, 56, 7 Madv. by conj.:
alius ordinis,
Amm. 30, 5, 10:
artificis aliusve,
Front. Controv. Agr. 2, 40, 27:
alius coloris,
Non. p. 450:
nomine vel ejus pro quo... aut alius qui, etc.,
Dig. 39, 2, 24, § 6; v. aliusmodi.—
B.
In comparisons, with atque, ac, or et, more rarely with nisi and quam; with the latter, in good class. authors, only when preceded by a neg. clause, or by an interrog. implying a neg.; cf. Ruhnk. ad Ter. And. 3, 3, 13; instead of quam, the comp. abl. or praeter, and similar words, sometimes appear, other than, different from, etc.
(α).
With atque, ac, or et:
illi sunt alio ingenio atque tu,
Plaut. Ps. 4, 7, 35:
alium esse censes nunc me atque olim quom dabam?
Ter. And. 3, 3, 13:
potest non solum aliud mihi ac tibi, sed mihi ipsi aliud alias videri,
Cic. Or. 71, 237:
longe alia nobis ac tu scripseras nuntiantur,
id. Att. 11, 10:
res alio modo est ac putatur,
id. Inv. 2, 6, 21 B. and K.:
qui longe alia ratione ac reliqui Galli bellum gerere coeperunt,
Caes. B. G. 3, 28:
non alius essem atque nunc sum,
Cic. Fam. 1, 9:
longe aliam esse navigationem in concluso mari atque in vastissimo atque apertissimo Oceano perspiciebant,
Caes. B. G. 3, 9: aliud (se) esse facturum ac pronunciasset, Nep. Ages. 3, 4:
alia atque antea sentiret,
id. Hann. 2, 2:
lux longe alia est solis et lychnorum,
is very different, Cic. Cael. 28.—
(β).
With nisi or quam (the latter is suspicious in Cic.; cf. Ochsn. Eclog. 252; Orell. ad Cic. Tusc. 1, 31, 75):
amare autem nihil aliud est, nisi eum ipsum diligere, quem ames,
nothing else than, only, Cic. Lael. 27, 100:
neque ulla fuit causa intermissionis epistularum nisi quod, etc.,
id. Fam. 7, 13:
erat historia nihil aliud nisi annalium confectio,
id. de Or. 2, 12:
Quid est aliud tumultus nisi perturbatio tanta, ut, etc.?
id. Phil. 8, 3:
nihil aliud agerem, nisi eum, qui accusatus esset, defenderem,
id. Sull. 12; id. Att. 5, 10:
quid est aliud Gigantum modo bellare cum dis nisi naturae repugnare?
id. Sen. 2, 5; id. Sex. Rosc. 19, 54; id. Rosc. Am. 5, 13; id. Leg. 1, 8, 25:
pinaster nihil aliud est quam pinus silvestris,
Plin. 16, 10; Nep. Arist. 2, 2; id. Paus. 1, 4:
Lysander nihil aliud molitus est quam ut omnes civitates in sua teneret potestate,
id. Lys. 1, 4:
neque aliud huic defuit quam generosa stirps,
id. Eum. 1, 2:
Nullo quippe alio vincis discrimine quam quod Illi marmoreum caput est, etc.,
Juv. 8, 54.—Hence, nihil aliud nisi or quam, = ouden allo ê, followed by finite verb, nothing else than, nothing but, only (after these words, fecit, factum est may be supplied, or the phraseology changed to nulla alia re facta; cf. Matth. Gr. 903; Hoogev. ad Vig. p. 475;
Kuhn. Gr. Gr. II. p. 825): tribunatus P. Sestii nihil aliud nisi meum nomen causamque sustinuit,
Cic. Sest. 6, 13:
ut nihil aliud nisi de hoste ac de laude cogitet,
id. Imp. Pomp. 22, 64; Liv. 2, 8:
et hostes quidem nihil aliud (i. e. nulla alia re facta) quam perfusis vano timore Romanis citato agmine abeunt,
id. 2, 63; 31, 24:
sed ab lictore nihil aliud quam prehendere prohibito, cum conversus in Patres impetus esset,
id. 2, 29:
ut domo abditus nihil aliud quam per edicta obnuntiaret,
Suet. Caes. 20:
mox nihil aliud quam vectabatur et deambulabat,
id. Aug. 83.—So, quid aliud quam? what other thing than? what else than? quibus quid aliud quam admonemus cives nos eorum esse, Liv. 4, 3:
quid aliud quam ad bellum vocabantur?
Flor. 3, 23 med.; so,
Quid Tullius? Anne aliud quam sidus?
Juv. 7, 199.—In affirmative-clauses rare, and only post-Aug.:
te alia omnia, quam quae velis, agere, moleste ferrem,
Plin. Ep. 7, 15, 2:
quod alium quam se cooptassent,
Suet. Ner. 2 al. —So, with the simple interrogative, quis alius? quid aliud? Qui, malum, alii? Ter. Eun. 4, 7, 10:
Quid te aliud sollicitat?
id. ib. 1, 2, 82:
Quid aliud tibi vis?
id. Heaut. 2, 3, 90:
Numquid vis aliud?
id. Eun. 1, 2, 111:
Sed quis nunc alius audet praeferre? etc.,
Juv. 12, 48:
Quid enim est aliud Antonius?
Cic. Phil. 2, 70:
Quid est aliud furere?
id. Pis. 47:
Quid est alia sinistra liberalitas?
Cat. 29, 15 al. —
(γ).
With comp. abl. (cf. in Gr. alla tôn dikaiôn, Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 25):
qui quaerit alia his, malum videtur quaerere,
other than, Plaut. Poen. prol. 22:
quod est aliud melle,
Varr. R. R. 3, 16: nec quidquam aliud libertate communi quaesisse, nothing else but, Brut. et Cass. ap. Cic. Fam. 11, 2:
neve putes alium sapiente bonoque beatum,
Hor. Ep. 1, 16, 20:
alius Lysippo,
id. ib. 2, 1, 240:
accusator alius Sejano,
Phaedr. 3, prol. 41.—
(δ).
With praeter:
nec nobis praeter me alius quisquam est servos Sosia,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 249:
nec quidquam aliud est philosophia praeter studium sapientiae,
Cic. Off. 2, 2, 5:
non est alius praeter eum,
Vulg. Marc. 12, 32:
rogavit numquid aliud ferret praeter arcam?
Cic. de Or. 2, 69:
Num quid igitur aliud in illis judiciis versatum est praeter hasce insidias?
id. Clu. 62:
nec jam tela alia habebant praeter gladios,
Liv. 38, 21, 5.—
(ε).
With extra (eccl. Lat.):
neque est alius extra te,
Vulg. 1 Reg. 2. 2; ib. Soph. 2, 15.—
(ζ).
With absque (eccl. Lat.):
non est alius Deus absque te,
Vulg. 1 Par. 17, 20.—
(η).
With praeterquam:
cum aliud, praeterquam de quo retulissent, decemviri dicere prohiberent,
Liv. 3, 40.
II.
Esp.
A.
In distributive-clauses repeated even several times, and also interchanged with non nulli, quidam, ceteri, pars, partim, etc., the one... the other; plur., some... others:
quid potes dicere cur alia defendas, alia non cures?
Cic. Phil. 2, 111:
latera tegentes alios, alios praegredientes amicos,
id. ib. 13, 4: cum alii fossas complerent, alii defensores vallo depellerent, Caes. B. G. 3, 25; id. B. C. 1, 55:
alii experimentorum notitiam necessariam esse contendunt, alii non satis potentem usum esse proponunt, Cels. prooem.: quae minus tuta erant, alia fossis, alia vallis, alia turribus muniebat,
Liv. 32, 5; so Vulg. Matt. 13, 5 sqq.; ib. 1 Cor. 12, 10; Cels. 3, 3, enumerating the different kinds of fever, repeats aliae seventeen times:
cum aliis Q. Frater legatus, aliis C. Pomptinus legatus, reliquis M. Anneius legatus etc.,
Cic. Fam. 15, 4, 8:
proferebant alii purpuram, tus alii, gemmas alii, vina non nulli Graeca,
id. Verr. 2, 5, 56, § 146: alias bestias nantes, alias volucres, serpentes quasdam, quasdam esse gradientes; earum ipsarum partim solivagas, partim congregatas;
immanes alias, quasdam autem cicures, non nullas abditas,
id. Tusc. 5, 13, 38:
principes partim interfecerant, alios in exsilium ejecerant,
Nep. Pelop. 1, 4:
nos alii ibimus Afros, pars Scythiam veniemus,
Verg. E. 1, 65:
alii superstantes proeliarentur, pars occulti muros subruerent,
Tac. H. 4, 23.—Sometimes alius is omitted in one clause:
Helvetii ea spe dejecti navibus junctis, alii vadis Rhodani, etc.,
Caes. B. G. 1, 8:
Veientes ignari in partem praedae suae vocatos deos, alios votis ex urbe sua evocatos, etc.,
Liv. 5, 21; Plin. 2, 43, 44, § 114:
castra metari placuit, ut opus et alii proelium inciperent,
Tac. A. 1, 63.—Also with aliquis:
alia sunt tamquam sibi nata, ut oculi, ut aures: aliqua etiam ceterorum membrorum usum adjuvant,
Cic. Fin. 3, 19, 63: [putat aliquis esse voluptatem bonum;
alius autem pecuniam],
id. Tusc. 5, 28, 60 B. and K.; cf. Goer. ad Cic. Ac. 2, 10, 20.—Sometimes aliud... aliud designate merely a distinction between two objects contrasted, one thing... another:
Numquam aliud natura, aliud sapientia dicit,
Juv. 14, 321:
Fuit tempus, quo alia adversa, alia secunda principi,
Plin. Pan. 72:
aliud est male dicere, aliud accusare,
Cic. Cael. 3; id. Lig. 16; Quint. 10, 1, 53:
aliud est servum esse, aliud servire,
id. 5, 10, 60 al.:
jam sciunt longe aliud esse virgines rapere, aliud pugnare cum viris,
Liv. 1, 12; cf. infra, e.—
B.
Alius repeated in another case, or with its derivatives, aliter, alias, alio, alibi, aliunde, etc. (but never with its derivatives in Tac.), in imitation of the Greek (cf. L. and S. s. v. allos, and Ochsn. Eclog. 110): simul alis alid aliunde rumitant inter se, Naev. ap. Fest. pp. 135 and 225; cf.
Bothe, Fragm. Comic. p. 25: alius alium percontamur, cuja est navis?
one another, Plaut. Stich. 2, 2, 46:
fallacia alia aliam trudit,
Ter. And. 4, 4, 40:
fecerunt alii quidem alia quam multa,
Cic. Phil. 3, 20, 6:
signa et ornamenta alia alio in loco intuebantur,
some in one place and some in another, id. Verr. 2. 1, 22:
alius in alia est re magis utilis,
id. Sex. Rosc. 111:
alius ex alia parte,
id. Verr. 1, 66:
dies alios alio dedit ordine Luna felicis operum,
Verg. G. 1, 276:
ut ipsi inter se alii aliis prodesse possent,
Cic. Off. 1, 7, 22; id. Leg. 1, 12, 33:
ideo multa conjecta sunt, aliud alio tempore,
id. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 7:
habes Sardos venales, alium alio nequiorem,
one worse than another, id. Fam. 7, 24: quo facto cum alius alii subsidium ferrent, one to another, Fr., l'un a
l'autre,
Caes. B. G. 2, 26 Herz.:
legiones aliae alia in parte resistunt,
id. ib. 2, 22:
alius alia causa illata,
id. ib. 1, 39:
cum ceteros alii alium alia de causa improbarent,
Suet. Vesp. 6:
alius alii subsidium ferunt,
Caes. B. G. 2, 26:
alius alio more viventes,
each in a different way, Sall. C. 6, 2:
alius alii tanti facinoris conscii,
id. ib. 22, 2; so id. ib. 52, 28; id. J. 53, 8; Curt. 10, 5, 16; Just. 15, 2:
alii autem aliud clamabant,
Vulg. Act. 19, 32:
illi alias aliud iisdem de rebus sentiunt,
now this, now that, Cic. de Or. 2, 7 fin.:
aliter ab aliis digeruntur,
id. ib. 2, 19; Vulg. 3 Reg. 22, 20:
equites alii alia dilapsi sunt,
some in this way, some in that, Liv. 44, 43:
cum alii alio mitterentur,
id. 7, 39: Alis alibi stantes, omnes tamen adversis volneribus conciderunt, Sall. ap. Charis. 2, p. 133:
jussit alios alibi fodere,
Liv. 44, 33; Vulg. Sap. 18, 18.—
C.
Alius ex alio, super alium, post alium, one after another; so often of the connection between ideas:
ut aliud ex alio incidit, occurrit, etc.,
Ter. Heaut. 3, 3, 37:
aliud ex alio succurrit mihi,
Cic. Fragm. C. 12:
alid ex alio reficit natura,
Lucr. 1, 263; 5, 1305; 5, 1456: sed, [p. 91] ut aliud ex alio, mihi non est dubium, quin, etc., Cic. Att. 16, 14, Plin. Pan. 18, 1:
ex alio in aliud vicissitudo atque mutatio,
Cic. Tusc. 5, 24, 69:
alias ex aliis nectendo moras,
Liv. 7, 39:
aliam ex alia prolem,
Verg. G. 3, 65; id. Cir. 364:
nos alia ex aliis in fata vocamur,
id. A. 3, 494:
quae impie per biennium alia super alia es ausus,
Liv. 3, 56; 23, 36:
aliud super aliud scelus,
id. 30, 26; Plin. Ep. 7, 8; Suet. Ner. 49:
deinde ab eo magistratu alium post alium sibi peperit,
Sall. J. 63, 5.—
D.
Alius atque alius or alius aliusque, the one and the other; now this, now that; different:
eadem res saepe aut probatur aut reicitur, alio atque alio elata verbo,
Cic. Or. 22, 72:
alio atque alio loco requiescere,
in different places, Sall. J. 72, 2:
inchoata res aliis atque aliis de causis dilata erat,
Liv. 8, 23:
aliud ejus subinde atque aliud facientes initium,
Sen. Ep. 32, 2:
cum alia atque alia appetendo loca munirent,
Liv. 1, 8:
milites trans flumen aliis atque aliis locis traiciebant,
id. 2, 2:
luna alio atque alio loco exoritur,
Plin. 2, 10:
febres aliae aliaeque subinde oriuntur,
Cels. 3, 3:
cancer aliis aliisque signis discernitur,
id. 5, 26:
aliis atque aliis causis,
Suet. Aug. 97.—In Sall. also alius deinde alius or alius post alius:
saepe tentantes agros alia deinde alia loca petiverant, J. 18, 7: alias deinde alias morae causas facere,
id. ib. 36, 2:
aliis post aliis minitari,
id. ib. 55, 8.—
E.
Of another kind or nature, i. e. different; hence, alium facere, to make different, to change, transform; and alium fleri, to become different, to be wholly changed:
nunc haec dies aliam vitam affert, alios mores postulat,
Ter. And. 1, 2, 18 (aliam vitam pro diversam, contrariam, Don.):
alium nunc censes esse me atque olim cum dabam,
id. ib. 3, 3, 13:
Huic aliud mercedis erit,
Verg. E. 6, 26:
longe alia mihi mens est,
Sall. C. 52, 2:
Vos aliam potatis aquam,
Juv. 5, 52:
lectus non alius cuiquam,
id. 8, 178:
ensesque recondit mors alia,
Stat. Th. 7, 806:
ostensus est in alia effigie,
Vulg. Marc. 16, 12; ib. Rom. 7, 23; ib. Gal. 1, 6; ib. Jac. 2, 25:
alium fecisti me, alius ad te veneram,
Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 123: alius nunc fieri volo, id. Poen. prol. fin.:
homines alii facti sunt,
Cic. Fam. 11, 12:
mutaberis in virum alium,
Vulg. 1 Reg. 10, 6; cf. supra, II. A. fin. —Hence, in alia omnia ire, transire, or discedere, sc. vota, to differ from the thing proposed; and in gen., to reject or oppose it, to go over to the opposite side: qui hoc censetis, illuc transite;
qui alia omnia, in hanc partem: his verbis praeit ominis videlicet causa, ne dicat: qui non censetis,
Fest. p. 221; Plin. Ep. 8, 14, 19:
frequens eum senatus reliquit et in alia omnia discessit,
Cic. Fam. 10, 12:
de tribus legatis frequentes ierunt in alia omnia,
id. ib. 1, 2 Manut.: cum prima M. Marcelli sententia pronunciata esset, frequens senatus in alia omnia iit, Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 13:
discessionem faciente Marcello, senatus frequens in alia omnia transiit,
Hirt. B. G. 8, 53: aliud or alias res agere, v. ago, II. 7.—
F.
Of that which remains of a whole, = reliquus, ceteri, the rest, the remainder:
Divitiaco ex aliis Gallis maximam fidem habebat,
Caes. B. G. 1, 41:
inter primos atrox proelium fuit, alia multitudo terga vertit,
Liv. 7, 26:
vulgus aliud trucidatum,
id. 7, 19; 2, 23; so id. 24, 1:
legiones in testudinem glomerabantur et alii tela incutiebant,
Tac. H. 3, 31; id. A. 1, 30; 3, 42:
cum alios incessus hostis clausisset, unum reliquum aestas impediret,
id. ib. 6, 33 al.—
G.
Like alter, one of two, the other of two:
huic fuerunt filii nati duo, alium servus surpuit, etc.,
Plaut. Capt. prol. 8; cf. id. ib. arg. 2 and 9: eis genus, aetas, eloquentia prope aequalia fuere;
magnitudo animi par, item gloria, sed alia alii,
Sall. C. 54, 1 Kritz:
duo Romani super alium alius corruerunt,
one upon the other, Liv. 1, 25, 5:
ita duo deinceps reges, alius alia via, civitatem auxerunt,
each in a different way, id. 1, 21, 6; 24, 27:
marique alio Nicopolim ingressus,
Tac. A. 5, 10 ( Ionio, Halm); so,
alias partes fovere,
the other side, id. H. 1, 8.—Also in the enumeration of the parts of any thing:
Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres, quarum unam incolunt Belgae, aliam Aquitani, tertiam Celtae,
Caes. B. G. 1, 1 Herz.:
classium item duo genera sunt: unum liburnarum, aliud lusoriarum,
Veg. 2, 1 (cf. in Gr. meinantes de tautên tên hêmeran, têi allêi eporeuonto, Xen. Anab. 3, 4, 1; and so the Vulg.: Alia die profecti, the next day, Act. 21, 8).—Hence, alius with a proper name used as an appell. (cf. alter):
ne quis alius Ariovistus regno Galliarum potiretur,
a second Ariovistus, Tac. H. 4, 73 fin.:
alius Nero,
Suet. Tit. 7.—
H.
A peculiar enhancement of the idea is produced by alius with a neg. and the comp.:
mulier, qua mulier alia nulla est pulchrior,
than whom no other woman is more beautiful, to whom no other woman is equal in beauty, Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 100:
facinus, quo non fortius ausit alis,
Cat. 66, 28:
Fama malum qua non aliud velocius ullum,
Verg. A. 4, 174:
quo neque melius neque amplius aliud in natura mortalium est,
Sall. J. 2, 4:
quo non aliud atrocius visum,
Tac. A. 6, 24:
(Sulla) neque consilio neque manu priorem alium pati,
Sall. J. 96, 3:
neque majus aliud neque praestabilius invenias,
id. ib. 1, 2; Liv. 1, 24:
non alia ante Romana pugna atrocior fuit,
id. 1, 27; 2, 31; Tac. A. 6, 7 al.; cf. under aliter, 2. b. z.—Hence the advv.
A.
ălĭō, adv. (an old dat. form, designating direction to a place; cf.: eo, quo), elsewhither (arch.), elsewhere, to another place, person, or thing, allose (class., esp. among poets; but not found in Lucr. or Juv.).
1.
In gen.
a.
Of place:
fortasse tu profectus alio fueras,
Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 49:
ut ab Norba alio traducerentur,
Liv. 32, 2:
translatos alio maerebis amores,
Hor. Epod. 15, 23:
decurrens alio,
id. S. 2, 1, 32:
nam frustra vitium vitaveris illud, Si te alio pravum detorseris,
id. ib. 2, 2, 55.—With quo:
Arpinumne mihi eundum sit, an quo alio,
to some other place, Cic. Att. 9, 17:
si quando Romam aliove quo mitterent legatos,
Liv. 38, 30. —
b.
Of persons or things (cf. alias, alibi, alicunde, etc.):
illi suum animum alio conferunt,
Ter. Heaut. 2, 4, 10 (cf. Plaut. Merc. 2, 2, 62:
ne ad illam me animum adjecisse sentiat): ne quando iratus tu alio conferas,
id. Eun. 3, 1, 60 Don.:
hi narrata ferunt alio,
Ov. M. 12, 57: tamen vocat me alio ( to another subject) jam dudum tacita vestra exspectatio, Cic. Clu. 23, 63; id. Verr. 2, 1, 53, § 139:
sed, si placet, sermonem alio transferamus,
id. de Or. 1, 29, 133:
quoniam alio properare tempus monet,
Sall. J. 19, 2; so Tac. A. 1, 18 al.—
c.
Of purpose or design:
appellet haec desideria naturae: cupiditatis nomen servet alio,
for another purpose, Cic. Fin. 2, 9, 27:
hoc longe alio spectabat,
looked quite elsewhere, had a far different design, Nep. Them. 6, 3.—
2.
a.. Alio... alio, in one way... in another; hither... thither, = huc... illuc:
hic (i. e. in ea re) alio res familiaris, alio ducit humanitas,
Cic. Off. 3, 23, 89: alio atque alio, in one way and another:
nihil alio atque alio spargitur,
Sen. Brev. Vit. 11, 2.—
b.
Alius alio, each in a different way, one in one way, another in another:
et ceteri quidem alius alio,
Cic. Off. 3, 20, 80:
aliud alio dissipavit,
id. Div. 1, 34, 76; so Liv. 2, 54, 9; 7, 39.—So, aliunde alio, from one place to another:
quassatione terrae aliunde alio (aquae) transferuntur,
Sen. Q. N. 3, 11, 1; cf. aliunde.—
c.
Like alius or aliter with a negative and the particles of comparison quam or atque;
in questions with nisi: plebem nusquam alio natam quam ad serviendum,
for nothing but, Liv. 7, 18, 7: non alio datam summam quam in emptionem, etc., * Suet. Aug. 98 Ruhnk.:
quo alio nisi ad nos confugerent?
Liv. 39, 36, 11; cf. Hand, Turs. I. pp. 232-234.—
B.
ălĭā, adv. (sc. via), in another way, in a different manner (in the whole ante-class. and class. per. dub.); for in Plaut. Rud. prol. 10, aliuta has been proposed; in Lucr. 6, 986, Lachm. reads alio; in Liv. 21, 56, 2, Weissenb. alibi; and in id. 44, 43, 2, via may be supplied from the preced. context; certain only in Don. ad Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 5; cf. Hand, Turs. I. p. 219.—
C.
ălĭās, adv. (acc. to Prisc. 1014 P., and Corss. Ausspr. I. p. 769, an acc. form like foras; but acc. to Herz. ad Caes. B. G. 5, 57, and Hab. Syn. 79, old gen. like paterfamili as, Alcmen as, etc. In the ante-class. per. rare; only once in Plaut., twice in Ter., twice in Varro; in the class. per. most freq. in Cic., but only three times in his orations; also in Plin.).
1.
Of time, at a time other than the present, whether it be in the past or (more freq.) in the future.
a.
At another time, at other times, on another occasion (alias: temporis adverbium, quod Graeci allote, aliter allôs, Capitol. Orth. 2242 P.; cf.
Herz. and Hab., as cited above): alias ut uti possim causa hac integra,
Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 4; so id. And. 3, 2, 49 (alias = alio tempore, Don.):
sed alias jocabimur,
Cic. Fam. 7, 13, 2:
sed plura scribemus alias,
id. ib. 7, 6:
et alias et in consulatus petitione vinci,
id. Planc. 18:
nil oriturum alias,
Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 17.—In the future, freq. in contrast with nunc, in praesentia, tum, hactenus:
recte secusne, alias viderimus,
Cic. Ac. 2, 44, 135:
Hactenus haec: alias justum sit necne poema, Nunc, etc.,
Hor. S. 1, 4, 63: sed haec alias pluribus;
nunc, etc.,
Cic. Div. 2, 2 fin.; Liv. 44, 36 fin.: quare placeat, alias ostendemus; in praesentia, etc., Auct. ad Her. 3, 16, 28.—In the past:
gubernatores alias imperare soliti, tum metu mortis jussa exsequebantur,
Curt. 4, 3, 18:
alias bellare inter se solitos, tunc periculi societas junxerat,
id. 9, 4, 15.—Freq. with advv. of time;
as numquam, umquam, and the like: si umquam in dicendo fuimus aliquid, aut etiam si numquam alias fuimus, tum profecto, etc.,
Cic. Att. 4, 2, 2:
consilio numquam alias dato,
Hor. C. 3, 5, 45:
numquam ante alias,
Liv. 2, 22, 7:
non umquam alias ante tantus terror senatum invasit,
id. 2, 9, 5; 1, 28, 4:
si quando umquam ante alias,
id. 32, 5 (where the four advv. of time are to be taken together):
Saturnalibus et si quando alias libuisset, modo munera dividebat,
Suet. Aug. 75.—
b.
Alias... alias, as in Gr. allote... allote; allote men... allote de, at one time... at another; once... another time; sometimes... sometimes; now... now:
Alias me poscit pro illa triginta minas, Alias talentum magnum,
Plaut. Curc. 1, 1, 63; so Varr. L. L. 8, § 76 Mull.; id. R. R. 2, 1, 15; Cic. Verr. 1, 46, 120:
nec potest quisquam alias beatus esse, alias miser,
id. Fin. 2, 27, 87:
contentius alias, alias summissius,
id. de Or. 3, 55, 212:
cum alias bellum inferrent, alias inlatum defenderent,
Caes. B. G. 2, 29; so id. ib. 5, 57 al.; it occurs four times in successive clauses in Cic. Inv. 1, 52, 99.—Sometimes plerumque, saepe, aliquando, interdum stand in corresponding clauses:
nec umquam sine usura reddit (terra), quod accepit, sed alias minore, plerumque majore cum foenore,
Cic. Sen. 15, 51:
geminatio verborum habet interdum vim, leporem alias,
id. de Or. 3, 54, 206:
hoc alias fastidio, alias contumacia, saepius imbecillitate, evenit,
Plin. 16, 32, 58, § 134; 7, 15, 13, § 63.—Sometimes one alias is omitted:
illi eruptione tentata alias cuniculis ad aggerem actis, etc.,
Caes. B. G. 3, 21; Plin. 26, 3, 7, § 13.—
c.
Alias aliter, alias alius, etc. (cf. alius), at one time in one way... at another in another; now so... now otherwise; now this... now that:
et alias aliter haec in utramque partem causae solent convenire,
Cic. Inv. 2, 13, 45:
alii enim sunt, alias nostrique familiares fere demortui,
id. Att. 16, 11 (Madv. interprets this of time):
illi alias aliud iisdem de rebus judicant,
id. de Or. 2, 7, 30; id. Or. 59, 200:
(deos) non semper eosdem atque alias alios solemus venerari,
id. Red. in Sen. 30:
ut iidem versus alias in aliam rem posse accommodari viderentur,
id. Div. 2, 54, 111.—
d.
Saepe alias or alias saepe... nunc, nuper, quondam, etc.;
also: cum saepe alias... tum, etc. (very common in Cic.): quod cum saepe alias tum nuper, etc.,
Cic. Tusc. 4, 4, 7:
fecimus et alias saepe et nuper in Tusculano,
id. ib. 5, 4, 11:
quibus de rebus et alias saepe... et quondam in Hortensii villa,
id. Ac. 2, 3, 9:
quorum pater et saepe alias et maxime censor saluti rei publicae fuit,
id. de Or. 1, 9, 38:
cum saepe alias, tum apud centumviros,
id. Brut. 39, 144:
cum saepe alias, tum Pyrrhi bello,
id. Off. 3, 22, 86; 3, 11, 47:
neque tum solum, sed saepe alias,
Nep. Hann. 11, 7.—In comparative sentences rare:
nunc tamen libentius quam saepe alias,
Symm. Ep. 1, 90.—So,
e.
Semper alias, always at other times or in other cases (apparently only post-Aug.): et super cenam autem et semper alias communissimus, multa joco transigebat. Suet. Vesp. 22; id. Tib. 18; Gell. 15, 1.—
f.
Raro alias, rarely at other times, on other occasions:
ut raro alias quisquam tanto favore est auditus,
Liv. 45, 20; 3, 69; Tac. H. 1, 89.—
g.
Non alias, at no other time, never, = numquam (a choice poet. expression, often imitated by [p. 92] the histt.):
non alias caelo ceciderunt plura sereno Fulgura,
never at any other time did so much lightning fall from a clear sky, Verg. G. 1, 487:
non alias militi familiarior dux fuit,
Liv. 7, 33; 45, 7:
non alias majore mole concursum,
Tac. A. 2, 46; 4. 69;
11, 31: non sane alias exercitatior Britannia fuit,
id. Agr. 5:
haud alias intentior populus plus vocis permisit,
id. A. 3, 11, and 15, 46; Suet. Tit. 8; Flor. 3, 6.—
2.
Of place, at another place, elsewhere; or in respect of other things, in other circumstances, otherwise (only post-Aug.; v. Madv. ad Cic. Fin. 1, 3, 7):
Idaeus rubus appellatus est, quoniam in Ida, non alias, nascitur,
Plin. 24, 14, 75, § 123 (Jan, alius): nusquam alias tam torrens fretum, * Just. 4, 1, 9:
sicut vir alias doctissimus Cornutus existimat,
Macr. S. 5, 19.—
3.
Alias for alioqui (only post-Aug.), to indicate that something is in a different condition in one instance, not in others, except that, for the rest, otherwise:
in Silaro non virgulta modo immersa, verum et folia lapidescunt, alias salubri potu ejus aquae,
Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 224; so id. 18, 6, 7, § 37; 19, 8, 48, § 163; 25, 2, 6, § 16 al.—
4.
Non alias quam, for no other reason, on no other condition, in no other circumstances than, not other than; and non alias nisi, on no other condition, not otherwise, except (prob. taken from the lang. of common life):
non alias magis indoluisse Caesarem ferunt quam quod, etc.,
Tac. A. 3, 73:
debilitatum vulnere jacuisse non alias quam simulatione mortis tutiorem,
by nothing safer than by feigning death, Curt. 8, 1, 24; 8, 14, 16; Dig. 29, 7, 6, § 2: non alias ( on no other condition) existet heres ex substitutione nisi, etc., ib. 28, 6, 8; 23, 3, 37, 23, 3, 29.—
5.
Alias like aliter, in another manner; flrst in the Lat. of the jurists (cf. Suet. Tib. 71 Oud.; Liv. 21, 56, 2 Drak.; Ter. And. 3, 2, 49 Ruhnk.), Dig. 33, 8, 8, § 8; cf. Hand, Turs. I. pp. 219-227. —
D.
ălĭtĕr, adv. [alis; v. alius init. ], otherwise, in another manner, allôs.
1.
With comparative-clause expressed; constr. both affirm. and neg. without distinction.
a.
With atque, ac, quam, and rarely ut, otherwise than, different from what, etc., Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 23:
sed aliter atque ostenderam facio,
Cic. Fam. 2, 3, 4; Ter. Ad. 4, 3, 6:
aliter ac nos vellemus,
Cic. Mil. 9, 23:
de quo tu aliter sentias atque ego,
id. Fin. 4, 22, 60; id. Att. 6, 3:
si aliter nos faciant quam aequum est,
Plaut. Stich. 1, 1, 42:
si aliter quippiam coacti faciant quam libere,
Cic. Rab. Post. 11, 29; id. Verr. 2, 1, 19, § 24; id. Inv. 2, 22, 66:
Sed si aliter ut dixi accidisset, qui possem queri?
id. Rep. 1, 4, 7.—
b.
Non (or haud) aliter, not otherwise (per litoten), = just as; with quam si, ac si, quam cum, quam, exactly, just as if:
Non aliter quam si ruat omnis Karthago,
Verg. A. 4, 669:
dividor haud aliter quam si mea membra relinquam,
Ov. Tr. 1, 3, 73:
nihil in senatu actum aliter quam si, etc.,
Liv. 23, 4; 21, 63, 9:
illi negabant se aliter ituros quam si, etc.,
id. 3, 51, 12:
nec aliter quam si mihi tradatur, etc., Quint. prooem. 5: ut non aliter ratio constet quam si uni reddatur,
Tac. A. 1, 6; 1, 49:
Non aliter quam si fecisset Juno maritum Insanum,
Juv. 6, 619; Suet. Aug. 40:
non aliter quam cum, etc.,
Ov. F. 2, 209; so id. M. 2, 623; 4, 348; 6, 516 al.:
nec scripsi aliter ac si, etc.,
Cic. Att. 13, 51; Suet. Oth. 6; Col. 2, 14 (15), 8:
Non aliter quam qui lembum subigit,
Verg. G. 1, 201:
non aliter praeformidat quam qui ferrum medici, priusquam curetur, aspexit,
Quint. 4, 5, 5; so id. 4, 5, 22; 2, 5, 11:
neque aliter quam ii, qui traduntur, etc.,
id. 5, 8, 1:
patere inde aliquid decrescere, non aliter quam Institor hibernae tegetis,
Juv. 7, 220:
successorem non aliter quam indicium mortis accepturum,
Tac. A. 6, 30.—
* c.
Aliter ab aliquo (analog. to alius with the abl., and alienus with ab), differently from any one:
cultores regionum multo aliter a ceteris agunt,
Mel. 1, 9, 6.—
d.
Non ali ter nisi, by no other means, on no other condition, not otherwise, except:
qui aliter obsistere fato fatetur se non potuisse, nisi etc.,
Cic. Fat. 20, 48; id. Fam. 1, 9: non pati C. Caesarem consulem aliter fieri, nisi exercitum et provincias tradiderit, Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 14; so Lentulus ap. Cic. Fam. 12, 14, 18; Liv. 35, 39; 45, 11; 38; Tac. Or. 32; Just. 12, 14, 7; Suet. Ner. 36; Dig. 37, 9, 6; 48, 18, 9. —
e.
Non aliter quam ut, on no other condition than that:
neque aliter poterit palos, ad quos perducitur, pertingere, quam ut diffluat,
Col. Arb. 7, 5; so Suet. Tib. 15; 24; id. Galb. 8; Curt. 9, 5, 23.—
2.
Without a comparative clause expressed.
a.
In gen., otherwise, in another manner, in other respects; and in the poets: haud aliter (per litoten), just so:
vale atque salve, etsi aliter ut dicam meres,
though you deserve that I speak differently, Plaut. Capt. 3, 5, 86 Brix:
tu si aliter existimes, nihil errabis,
Cic. Fam. 3, 7, 16:
ut eadem ab utrisque dicantur, aliter dicuntur,
in a different sense, Plin. Pan. 72, 7:
Si quis aliter docet,
Vulg. 1 Tim. 6, 3:
quae aliter se habent,
ib. ib. 5, 25:
Quippe aliter tunc vivebant homines,
Juv. 6, 11: quod uterque nostrum his etiam ex studiis notus, quibus aliter ignotus est, otherwise, i. e. personally, unknown, Plin. Ep. 9, 23, 3.—With negatives:
non fuit faciendum aliter,
Cic. Att. 6, 9; Tac. A. 15, 68:
Ergo non aliter poterit dormire?
Juv. 3, 281:
aliter haud facile eos ad tantum negotium impelli posse,
Sall. C. 44, 1; Curt. 8, 10, 27:
haud aliter Rutulo muros et castra tuenti Ignescunt irae (the comparison of the wolf precedes),
Verg. A. 9, 65:
haud aliter (i. e. like a wild beast) juvenis medios moriturus in hostes Irruit,
id. ib. 9, 554 al.; Ov. M. 8, 473; 9, 642:
non aliter (i. e. than I) Samio dicunt arsisse Bathyllo Anacreonta Teium,
Hor. Epod. 14, 10:
neque Mordaces aliter (i. e. than by means of wine) diffugiunt sollicitudines,
id. C. 1, 18, 4:
neque exercitum Romanum aliter transmissurum,
Tac. H. 5, 19:
nec aliter expiari potest,
Vulg. Num. 35, 33. —So, fieri aliter non potest or fieri non potest aliter (not fieri non aliter potest): nihil agis;
Fieri aliter non potest,
Ter. Ad. 5, 8, 13: assentior;
fieri non potuit aliter,
Cic. Att. 6, 6.—
b.
Esp.
(α).
Pregn., otherwise, in the contrary manner: Pe. Servos Epidicus dixit mihi. Ph. Quid si servo aliter visum est? i. e. if he does not speak the truth? Plaut. Ep. 4, 2, 29:
verum aliter evenire multo intellegit,
Ter. And. prol. 4 (aliter autem contra significat, Don.):
amplis cornibus et nigris potius quam aliter,
Varr. R. R. 1, 20, 1: ne aliter quid eveniat, providere de cet, otherwise than harmoniously, Sall. J. 10, 7:
dis aliter visum,
Verg. A. 2, 428:
sin aliter tibi videtur,
Vulg. Num. 11, 15: adversi... saevaque circuitu curvantem bracchia longo Scorpion atque aliter ( in the opposite direction) curvantem bracchia Cancrum, Ov. M. 2, 83: aliterque ( and in the opposite course) secante jam pelagus rostro, Luc. 8, 197.—Hence, qui aliter fecerit, who will not do that:
neu quis de his postea ad senatum referat, neve cum populo agat: qui aliter fecerit, etc.,
Sall. C. 51, 43; Just. 6, 6, 1; cf. Brisson. de Form. p. 200, and de Verb. Signif. p. 66.—
(β).
Aliter esse, to be of a different nature, differently constituted or disposed:
sed longe aliter est amicus atque amator,
Plaut. Truc. 1, 2, 70: ego hunc esse aliter credidi: iste me fefellit;
ego isti nihilo sum aliter ac fui,
Ter. Phorm. 3, 2, 44; id. Ad. 3, 4, 46; Cic. Rosc. Am. 47, 137.—
(γ).
For alioqui (q. v. II. C.), otherwise, else, in any other case:
jus enim semper est quaesitum aequabile: neque enim aliter esset jus (and just after: nam aliter justitia non esset),
Cic. Off. 2, 12, 42; 1, 39, 139; id. Lael. 20, 74:
si suos legatos recipere vellent, quos Athenas miserant, se remitterent, aliter illos numquam in patriam essent recepturi,
Nep. Them. 7 fin.:
aliter sine populi jussu nulli earum rerum consuli jus est,
Sall. C. 29, 3 Kritz:
aliter non viribus ullis Vincere poteris,
Verg. A. 6, 147:
veniam ostentantes, si praesentia sequerentur: aliter nihil spei,
Tac. H. 4, 59:
quoniam aliter non possem,
Vulg. Sap. 8, 21.—
(δ).
Like alius (q. v. II. A.) repeated even several times in a distributive manner, in one way... in another: sed aliter leges, aliter philosophi tollunt astutias. Cic. Off. 3, 17, 68; so id. ib. 1, 12, 38; id. Lael. 24, 89; id. Fam. 15, 21, 6:
aliter utimur propriis, aliter commodatis,
Tac. Or. 32:
Aliter catuli longe olent, aliter sues,
Plaut. Ep. 4, 2, 9:
aliter Diodoro, aliter Philoni, Chrysippo aliter placet,
id. Ac. 2, 47, 143:
idem illud aliter Caesar, aliter Cicero, aliter Cato suadere debebit,
Quint. 3, 8, 49: Et aliter acutis morbis medendum, aliter vetustis; aliter increscentibus, aliter subsistentibus, aliter jam ad sanitatem inclinatis, Cels. prooem. p. 10.—
(ε).
With alius or its derivatives, one in one way, another in another (v. alius, II. B.):
quoniam aliter ab aliis digeruntur,
Cic. de Or. 2, 19, 79; id. Att. 7, 8; Liv. 2, 21; so id. 39, 53:
hoc ex locorum occasione aliter alibi decernitur,
Plin. 18, 5, 6, § 30; so id. 25, 4, 10, § 29.—
(ζ).
Non aliter, analog. to non alius (v. alius, II. H.) with a comp. (only in Plin.):
non aliter utilius id fieri putare quam, etc.,
Plin. 37, 2, 10, § 28:
idque non aliter clarius intellegi potest,
id. 37, 4, 15, § 59; so id. 22, 22, 36, § 78; 24, 11, 50, § 85; 28, 9, 41, § 148; cf. Hand, Turs. I. pp. 267-276.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > Alius

5 alius

1.
Ālĭus (better Ālĕus), a, um, adj., = Elius (v. Alis and Elis), Elian; subst., a native of Elis, a town in Achaia (only a few times in Plaut. Capt.):
postquam belligerant Aetoli cum Aleis,
Plaut. Capt. prol. 24; 27; 2, 2, 30.
2.
ălĭus, a, ud, adj. and subst. (old form, alis, alid, after the analogy of quis, quid:
alis rare,
Cat. 66, 28; Sall. ap. Charis, 2, p. 133; Inscr. Orell. 2488:
alid more freq.,
Lucr. 1, 263; 5, 257; 5, 1305; 5, 1456; Cat. 29, 15; cf. Prisc. 13, p. 959.— Gen. sing. masc.: alius, rare, and not used by Tac.; for which alterius is com. used (v. alter); also alii, Cato and Licin. ap. Prisc. 194 P.; Varr. R. R. 1, 2.— Fem. gen.:
aliae,
Lucr. 3, 918; Cic. Div. 2, 13, 30; Liv. 24, 27, 8; Gell. 2, 28, 1; Capito ap. Gell. 4, 10, 8.— Masc. dat.:
ali,
Lucr. 6, 1226:
alio,
Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 13. — Fem. dat.:
aliae,
Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 207; Gell. 9, 4, 8) [cf. allos; Osc. allo ( nom. sing. fem.); Goth. alis; Erse, aile; O. H. Germ. alles, elles ( conj.); Engl. else], another, [p. 90] other (i. e. of many, whereas alter is one of two, v. exceptt. under II. G.); freq. with the indef. pronn. aliquis, quis, aliqui, qui, quidam, and the interrog. quis, qui, etc.
I.
A.. In gen.:
eorum sectam sequuntur multi mortales... multi alii ex Troja strenui viri,
Naev. Bell. Pun. 1, 16:
alios multos,
Vulg. Matt. 15, 30; ib. Marc. 7, 4:
plures alios,
ib. ib. 12, 5:
cum aliis pluribus,
ib. Act. 15, 35:
an ita dissolvit, ut omnes alii dissolverunt?
Cic. Font. 1; Tac. H. 5, 5:
dum aliud aliquid flagiti conficiat,
Ter. Phorm. 5, 2, 5:
nec nobis praeter med alius quisquam est servos Sosia,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 244:
nec quisquam alius affuit,
id. ib. 1, 1, 269:
panem vel aliud quidquam,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 3, 35. utrum hanc actionem habebis an aliam quampiam; Cic. Caecin. 37:
quidquid aliud dare,
Vulg. Lev. 22, 25:
ALIS NE POTESTO,
Inscr. Orell. 2488:
datum Mi esse ab dis aliis,
Plaut. Am. prol. 12:
adulescentulo in alio occupato amore,
Ter. And. 5, 1, 10:
aut aliae cujus desiderium insideat rei,
Lucr. 3, 918:
ne quam aliam quaerat copiam,
Ter. Heaut. 5, 1, 54:
nisi quid pater ait aliud,
id. And. 5, 4, 47:
si verum est, Q. Fabium Labeonem seu quem alium arbitrum a senatu datum, etc.,
Cic. Off. 1, 10, 33:
quodcumque alid auget,
Lucr. 5, 257:
Est alius quidam, parasitaster paululus,
Ter. Ad. 5. 2, 4; so Vulg. Luc. 22, 59:
tuo (judicio) stabis, si aliud quoddam est tuum,
Cic. Or. 71, 237:
L. Aemilius alius vir erat,
Liv. 44, 18:
Genus ecce aliud discriminis audi,
Juv. 12, 24:
alius, ne condemnaretur, pecuniam dedit,
Cic. Verr. 5, 117; Tac. Agr. 39:
nemo alius,
Cic. Pis. 94; Vulg. Joan. 15, 24:
alius nemo,
Cic. Quinct. 76:
plus alimenti est in pane quam in ullo alio,
Cels. 2, 18:
aliud esse causae suspicamur,
Cic. Fl. 39:
Anne aliud tunc praefecti?
Juv. 4, 78:
estne viris reliqui aliud,
Sall. Fragm. 187, 19:
aliud auxilii,
Tac. A. 5, 8:
aliud subsidii,
id. ib. 12, 46:
alia honorum,
id. ib. 1, 9:
alia sumptuum,
id. ib. 15, 15:
sunt alia quae magis timeam,
Cic. Phil. 5, 29: Facete is quidem, sicut alia, many other things, id. Fin. 1, 3, 7 Madv.:
haec aliaque,
Tac. H. 3, 51 al. —
Hence, alio die, t. t. of the soothsayer, when he wished the Comitia postponed to another day, on the pretence of unfavorable omens: quid gravius quam rem susceptam dirimi, si unus augur alio die dixerit?
Cic. Leg. 2, 12, 31; id. Phil. 2, 33, 83 and 84 Wernsd. Perh. there is a reference to the same thing in Plaut. Poen. 2, 52: ita res divina mihi fuit: res serias omnes extollo ex hoc die in alium diem.—With aliquis, quisquam, or ullus implied (cf. aliqui, V. B., and aliquis, II. B.):
ut, etiam si aliud melius fuit, tamen legatorum reditum exspectetis,
Cic. Phil. 6, 6:
utar post alio, si invenero melius,
something else, id. Tusc. 1, 7, 14; so,
si in aliud tempus differetur,
Caes. B C. 1, 86:
an alium exspectamus?
Vulg. Matt. 11, 3; ib. Marc. 4, 36:
siti magis quam alia re accenditur,
Sall. J. 89, 5:
neque sex legiones alia de causa missas in Hispaniam,
Caes. B. C. 1, 85:
neque creatura alia poterit nos separare,
Vulg. Rom. 8, 39.
► Instances of the rare gen.
alius:
alius generis bestiae,
Cic. N. D. 2, 48, 123; Varr. L. L. 9, 40, 67 dub.:
alius ingenii,
Liv. 1, 56, 7 Madv. by conj.:
alius ordinis,
Amm. 30, 5, 10:
artificis aliusve,
Front. Controv. Agr. 2, 40, 27:
alius coloris,
Non. p. 450:
nomine vel ejus pro quo... aut alius qui, etc.,
Dig. 39, 2, 24, § 6; v. aliusmodi.—
B.
In comparisons, with atque, ac, or et, more rarely with nisi and quam; with the latter, in good class. authors, only when preceded by a neg. clause, or by an interrog. implying a neg.; cf. Ruhnk. ad Ter. And. 3, 3, 13; instead of quam, the comp. abl. or praeter, and similar words, sometimes appear, other than, different from, etc.
(α).
With atque, ac, or et:
illi sunt alio ingenio atque tu,
Plaut. Ps. 4, 7, 35:
alium esse censes nunc me atque olim quom dabam?
Ter. And. 3, 3, 13:
potest non solum aliud mihi ac tibi, sed mihi ipsi aliud alias videri,
Cic. Or. 71, 237:
longe alia nobis ac tu scripseras nuntiantur,
id. Att. 11, 10:
res alio modo est ac putatur,
id. Inv. 2, 6, 21 B. and K.:
qui longe alia ratione ac reliqui Galli bellum gerere coeperunt,
Caes. B. G. 3, 28:
non alius essem atque nunc sum,
Cic. Fam. 1, 9:
longe aliam esse navigationem in concluso mari atque in vastissimo atque apertissimo Oceano perspiciebant,
Caes. B. G. 3, 9: aliud (se) esse facturum ac pronunciasset, Nep. Ages. 3, 4:
alia atque antea sentiret,
id. Hann. 2, 2:
lux longe alia est solis et lychnorum,
is very different, Cic. Cael. 28.—
(β).
With nisi or quam (the latter is suspicious in Cic.; cf. Ochsn. Eclog. 252; Orell. ad Cic. Tusc. 1, 31, 75):
amare autem nihil aliud est, nisi eum ipsum diligere, quem ames,
nothing else than, only, Cic. Lael. 27, 100:
neque ulla fuit causa intermissionis epistularum nisi quod, etc.,
id. Fam. 7, 13:
erat historia nihil aliud nisi annalium confectio,
id. de Or. 2, 12:
Quid est aliud tumultus nisi perturbatio tanta, ut, etc.?
id. Phil. 8, 3:
nihil aliud agerem, nisi eum, qui accusatus esset, defenderem,
id. Sull. 12; id. Att. 5, 10:
quid est aliud Gigantum modo bellare cum dis nisi naturae repugnare?
id. Sen. 2, 5; id. Sex. Rosc. 19, 54; id. Rosc. Am. 5, 13; id. Leg. 1, 8, 25:
pinaster nihil aliud est quam pinus silvestris,
Plin. 16, 10; Nep. Arist. 2, 2; id. Paus. 1, 4:
Lysander nihil aliud molitus est quam ut omnes civitates in sua teneret potestate,
id. Lys. 1, 4:
neque aliud huic defuit quam generosa stirps,
id. Eum. 1, 2:
Nullo quippe alio vincis discrimine quam quod Illi marmoreum caput est, etc.,
Juv. 8, 54.—Hence, nihil aliud nisi or quam, = ouden allo ê, followed by finite verb, nothing else than, nothing but, only (after these words, fecit, factum est may be supplied, or the phraseology changed to nulla alia re facta; cf. Matth. Gr. 903; Hoogev. ad Vig. p. 475;
Kuhn. Gr. Gr. II. p. 825): tribunatus P. Sestii nihil aliud nisi meum nomen causamque sustinuit,
Cic. Sest. 6, 13:
ut nihil aliud nisi de hoste ac de laude cogitet,
id. Imp. Pomp. 22, 64; Liv. 2, 8:
et hostes quidem nihil aliud (i. e. nulla alia re facta) quam perfusis vano timore Romanis citato agmine abeunt,
id. 2, 63; 31, 24:
sed ab lictore nihil aliud quam prehendere prohibito, cum conversus in Patres impetus esset,
id. 2, 29:
ut domo abditus nihil aliud quam per edicta obnuntiaret,
Suet. Caes. 20:
mox nihil aliud quam vectabatur et deambulabat,
id. Aug. 83.—So, quid aliud quam? what other thing than? what else than? quibus quid aliud quam admonemus cives nos eorum esse, Liv. 4, 3:
quid aliud quam ad bellum vocabantur?
Flor. 3, 23 med.; so,
Quid Tullius? Anne aliud quam sidus?
Juv. 7, 199.—In affirmative-clauses rare, and only post-Aug.:
te alia omnia, quam quae velis, agere, moleste ferrem,
Plin. Ep. 7, 15, 2:
quod alium quam se cooptassent,
Suet. Ner. 2 al. —So, with the simple interrogative, quis alius? quid aliud? Qui, malum, alii? Ter. Eun. 4, 7, 10:
Quid te aliud sollicitat?
id. ib. 1, 2, 82:
Quid aliud tibi vis?
id. Heaut. 2, 3, 90:
Numquid vis aliud?
id. Eun. 1, 2, 111:
Sed quis nunc alius audet praeferre? etc.,
Juv. 12, 48:
Quid enim est aliud Antonius?
Cic. Phil. 2, 70:
Quid est aliud furere?
id. Pis. 47:
Quid est alia sinistra liberalitas?
Cat. 29, 15 al. —
(γ).
With comp. abl. (cf. in Gr. alla tôn dikaiôn, Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 25):
qui quaerit alia his, malum videtur quaerere,
other than, Plaut. Poen. prol. 22:
quod est aliud melle,
Varr. R. R. 3, 16: nec quidquam aliud libertate communi quaesisse, nothing else but, Brut. et Cass. ap. Cic. Fam. 11, 2:
neve putes alium sapiente bonoque beatum,
Hor. Ep. 1, 16, 20:
alius Lysippo,
id. ib. 2, 1, 240:
accusator alius Sejano,
Phaedr. 3, prol. 41.—
(δ).
With praeter:
nec nobis praeter me alius quisquam est servos Sosia,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 249:
nec quidquam aliud est philosophia praeter studium sapientiae,
Cic. Off. 2, 2, 5:
non est alius praeter eum,
Vulg. Marc. 12, 32:
rogavit numquid aliud ferret praeter arcam?
Cic. de Or. 2, 69:
Num quid igitur aliud in illis judiciis versatum est praeter hasce insidias?
id. Clu. 62:
nec jam tela alia habebant praeter gladios,
Liv. 38, 21, 5.—
(ε).
With extra (eccl. Lat.):
neque est alius extra te,
Vulg. 1 Reg. 2. 2; ib. Soph. 2, 15.—
(ζ).
With absque (eccl. Lat.):
non est alius Deus absque te,
Vulg. 1 Par. 17, 20.—
(η).
With praeterquam:
cum aliud, praeterquam de quo retulissent, decemviri dicere prohiberent,
Liv. 3, 40.
II.
Esp.
A.
In distributive-clauses repeated even several times, and also interchanged with non nulli, quidam, ceteri, pars, partim, etc., the one... the other; plur., some... others:
quid potes dicere cur alia defendas, alia non cures?
Cic. Phil. 2, 111:
latera tegentes alios, alios praegredientes amicos,
id. ib. 13, 4: cum alii fossas complerent, alii defensores vallo depellerent, Caes. B. G. 3, 25; id. B. C. 1, 55:
alii experimentorum notitiam necessariam esse contendunt, alii non satis potentem usum esse proponunt, Cels. prooem.: quae minus tuta erant, alia fossis, alia vallis, alia turribus muniebat,
Liv. 32, 5; so Vulg. Matt. 13, 5 sqq.; ib. 1 Cor. 12, 10; Cels. 3, 3, enumerating the different kinds of fever, repeats aliae seventeen times:
cum aliis Q. Frater legatus, aliis C. Pomptinus legatus, reliquis M. Anneius legatus etc.,
Cic. Fam. 15, 4, 8:
proferebant alii purpuram, tus alii, gemmas alii, vina non nulli Graeca,
id. Verr. 2, 5, 56, § 146: alias bestias nantes, alias volucres, serpentes quasdam, quasdam esse gradientes; earum ipsarum partim solivagas, partim congregatas;
immanes alias, quasdam autem cicures, non nullas abditas,
id. Tusc. 5, 13, 38:
principes partim interfecerant, alios in exsilium ejecerant,
Nep. Pelop. 1, 4:
nos alii ibimus Afros, pars Scythiam veniemus,
Verg. E. 1, 65:
alii superstantes proeliarentur, pars occulti muros subruerent,
Tac. H. 4, 23.—Sometimes alius is omitted in one clause:
Helvetii ea spe dejecti navibus junctis, alii vadis Rhodani, etc.,
Caes. B. G. 1, 8:
Veientes ignari in partem praedae suae vocatos deos, alios votis ex urbe sua evocatos, etc.,
Liv. 5, 21; Plin. 2, 43, 44, § 114:
castra metari placuit, ut opus et alii proelium inciperent,
Tac. A. 1, 63.—Also with aliquis:
alia sunt tamquam sibi nata, ut oculi, ut aures: aliqua etiam ceterorum membrorum usum adjuvant,
Cic. Fin. 3, 19, 63: [putat aliquis esse voluptatem bonum;
alius autem pecuniam],
id. Tusc. 5, 28, 60 B. and K.; cf. Goer. ad Cic. Ac. 2, 10, 20.—Sometimes aliud... aliud designate merely a distinction between two objects contrasted, one thing... another:
Numquam aliud natura, aliud sapientia dicit,
Juv. 14, 321:
Fuit tempus, quo alia adversa, alia secunda principi,
Plin. Pan. 72:
aliud est male dicere, aliud accusare,
Cic. Cael. 3; id. Lig. 16; Quint. 10, 1, 53:
aliud est servum esse, aliud servire,
id. 5, 10, 60 al.:
jam sciunt longe aliud esse virgines rapere, aliud pugnare cum viris,
Liv. 1, 12; cf. infra, e.—
B.
Alius repeated in another case, or with its derivatives, aliter, alias, alio, alibi, aliunde, etc. (but never with its derivatives in Tac.), in imitation of the Greek (cf. L. and S. s. v. allos, and Ochsn. Eclog. 110): simul alis alid aliunde rumitant inter se, Naev. ap. Fest. pp. 135 and 225; cf.
Bothe, Fragm. Comic. p. 25: alius alium percontamur, cuja est navis?
one another, Plaut. Stich. 2, 2, 46:
fallacia alia aliam trudit,
Ter. And. 4, 4, 40:
fecerunt alii quidem alia quam multa,
Cic. Phil. 3, 20, 6:
signa et ornamenta alia alio in loco intuebantur,
some in one place and some in another, id. Verr. 2. 1, 22:
alius in alia est re magis utilis,
id. Sex. Rosc. 111:
alius ex alia parte,
id. Verr. 1, 66:
dies alios alio dedit ordine Luna felicis operum,
Verg. G. 1, 276:
ut ipsi inter se alii aliis prodesse possent,
Cic. Off. 1, 7, 22; id. Leg. 1, 12, 33:
ideo multa conjecta sunt, aliud alio tempore,
id. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 7:
habes Sardos venales, alium alio nequiorem,
one worse than another, id. Fam. 7, 24: quo facto cum alius alii subsidium ferrent, one to another, Fr., l'un a
l'autre,
Caes. B. G. 2, 26 Herz.:
legiones aliae alia in parte resistunt,
id. ib. 2, 22:
alius alia causa illata,
id. ib. 1, 39:
cum ceteros alii alium alia de causa improbarent,
Suet. Vesp. 6:
alius alii subsidium ferunt,
Caes. B. G. 2, 26:
alius alio more viventes,
each in a different way, Sall. C. 6, 2:
alius alii tanti facinoris conscii,
id. ib. 22, 2; so id. ib. 52, 28; id. J. 53, 8; Curt. 10, 5, 16; Just. 15, 2:
alii autem aliud clamabant,
Vulg. Act. 19, 32:
illi alias aliud iisdem de rebus sentiunt,
now this, now that, Cic. de Or. 2, 7 fin.:
aliter ab aliis digeruntur,
id. ib. 2, 19; Vulg. 3 Reg. 22, 20:
equites alii alia dilapsi sunt,
some in this way, some in that, Liv. 44, 43:
cum alii alio mitterentur,
id. 7, 39: Alis alibi stantes, omnes tamen adversis volneribus conciderunt, Sall. ap. Charis. 2, p. 133:
jussit alios alibi fodere,
Liv. 44, 33; Vulg. Sap. 18, 18.—
C.
Alius ex alio, super alium, post alium, one after another; so often of the connection between ideas:
ut aliud ex alio incidit, occurrit, etc.,
Ter. Heaut. 3, 3, 37:
aliud ex alio succurrit mihi,
Cic. Fragm. C. 12:
alid ex alio reficit natura,
Lucr. 1, 263; 5, 1305; 5, 1456: sed, [p. 91] ut aliud ex alio, mihi non est dubium, quin, etc., Cic. Att. 16, 14, Plin. Pan. 18, 1:
ex alio in aliud vicissitudo atque mutatio,
Cic. Tusc. 5, 24, 69:
alias ex aliis nectendo moras,
Liv. 7, 39:
aliam ex alia prolem,
Verg. G. 3, 65; id. Cir. 364:
nos alia ex aliis in fata vocamur,
id. A. 3, 494:
quae impie per biennium alia super alia es ausus,
Liv. 3, 56; 23, 36:
aliud super aliud scelus,
id. 30, 26; Plin. Ep. 7, 8; Suet. Ner. 49:
deinde ab eo magistratu alium post alium sibi peperit,
Sall. J. 63, 5.—
D.
Alius atque alius or alius aliusque, the one and the other; now this, now that; different:
eadem res saepe aut probatur aut reicitur, alio atque alio elata verbo,
Cic. Or. 22, 72:
alio atque alio loco requiescere,
in different places, Sall. J. 72, 2:
inchoata res aliis atque aliis de causis dilata erat,
Liv. 8, 23:
aliud ejus subinde atque aliud facientes initium,
Sen. Ep. 32, 2:
cum alia atque alia appetendo loca munirent,
Liv. 1, 8:
milites trans flumen aliis atque aliis locis traiciebant,
id. 2, 2:
luna alio atque alio loco exoritur,
Plin. 2, 10:
febres aliae aliaeque subinde oriuntur,
Cels. 3, 3:
cancer aliis aliisque signis discernitur,
id. 5, 26:
aliis atque aliis causis,
Suet. Aug. 97.—In Sall. also alius deinde alius or alius post alius:
saepe tentantes agros alia deinde alia loca petiverant, J. 18, 7: alias deinde alias morae causas facere,
id. ib. 36, 2:
aliis post aliis minitari,
id. ib. 55, 8.—
E.
Of another kind or nature, i. e. different; hence, alium facere, to make different, to change, transform; and alium fleri, to become different, to be wholly changed:
nunc haec dies aliam vitam affert, alios mores postulat,
Ter. And. 1, 2, 18 (aliam vitam pro diversam, contrariam, Don.):
alium nunc censes esse me atque olim cum dabam,
id. ib. 3, 3, 13:
Huic aliud mercedis erit,
Verg. E. 6, 26:
longe alia mihi mens est,
Sall. C. 52, 2:
Vos aliam potatis aquam,
Juv. 5, 52:
lectus non alius cuiquam,
id. 8, 178:
ensesque recondit mors alia,
Stat. Th. 7, 806:
ostensus est in alia effigie,
Vulg. Marc. 16, 12; ib. Rom. 7, 23; ib. Gal. 1, 6; ib. Jac. 2, 25:
alium fecisti me, alius ad te veneram,
Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 123: alius nunc fieri volo, id. Poen. prol. fin.:
homines alii facti sunt,
Cic. Fam. 11, 12:
mutaberis in virum alium,
Vulg. 1 Reg. 10, 6; cf. supra, II. A. fin. —Hence, in alia omnia ire, transire, or discedere, sc. vota, to differ from the thing proposed; and in gen., to reject or oppose it, to go over to the opposite side: qui hoc censetis, illuc transite;
qui alia omnia, in hanc partem: his verbis praeit ominis videlicet causa, ne dicat: qui non censetis,
Fest. p. 221; Plin. Ep. 8, 14, 19:
frequens eum senatus reliquit et in alia omnia discessit,
Cic. Fam. 10, 12:
de tribus legatis frequentes ierunt in alia omnia,
id. ib. 1, 2 Manut.: cum prima M. Marcelli sententia pronunciata esset, frequens senatus in alia omnia iit, Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 13:
discessionem faciente Marcello, senatus frequens in alia omnia transiit,
Hirt. B. G. 8, 53: aliud or alias res agere, v. ago, II. 7.—
F.
Of that which remains of a whole, = reliquus, ceteri, the rest, the remainder:
Divitiaco ex aliis Gallis maximam fidem habebat,
Caes. B. G. 1, 41:
inter primos atrox proelium fuit, alia multitudo terga vertit,
Liv. 7, 26:
vulgus aliud trucidatum,
id. 7, 19; 2, 23; so id. 24, 1:
legiones in testudinem glomerabantur et alii tela incutiebant,
Tac. H. 3, 31; id. A. 1, 30; 3, 42:
cum alios incessus hostis clausisset, unum reliquum aestas impediret,
id. ib. 6, 33 al.—
G.
Like alter, one of two, the other of two:
huic fuerunt filii nati duo, alium servus surpuit, etc.,
Plaut. Capt. prol. 8; cf. id. ib. arg. 2 and 9: eis genus, aetas, eloquentia prope aequalia fuere;
magnitudo animi par, item gloria, sed alia alii,
Sall. C. 54, 1 Kritz:
duo Romani super alium alius corruerunt,
one upon the other, Liv. 1, 25, 5:
ita duo deinceps reges, alius alia via, civitatem auxerunt,
each in a different way, id. 1, 21, 6; 24, 27:
marique alio Nicopolim ingressus,
Tac. A. 5, 10 ( Ionio, Halm); so,
alias partes fovere,
the other side, id. H. 1, 8.—Also in the enumeration of the parts of any thing:
Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres, quarum unam incolunt Belgae, aliam Aquitani, tertiam Celtae,
Caes. B. G. 1, 1 Herz.:
classium item duo genera sunt: unum liburnarum, aliud lusoriarum,
Veg. 2, 1 (cf. in Gr. meinantes de tautên tên hêmeran, têi allêi eporeuonto, Xen. Anab. 3, 4, 1; and so the Vulg.: Alia die profecti, the next day, Act. 21, 8).—Hence, alius with a proper name used as an appell. (cf. alter):
ne quis alius Ariovistus regno Galliarum potiretur,
a second Ariovistus, Tac. H. 4, 73 fin.:
alius Nero,
Suet. Tit. 7.—
H.
A peculiar enhancement of the idea is produced by alius with a neg. and the comp.:
mulier, qua mulier alia nulla est pulchrior,
than whom no other woman is more beautiful, to whom no other woman is equal in beauty, Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 100:
facinus, quo non fortius ausit alis,
Cat. 66, 28:
Fama malum qua non aliud velocius ullum,
Verg. A. 4, 174:
quo neque melius neque amplius aliud in natura mortalium est,
Sall. J. 2, 4:
quo non aliud atrocius visum,
Tac. A. 6, 24:
(Sulla) neque consilio neque manu priorem alium pati,
Sall. J. 96, 3:
neque majus aliud neque praestabilius invenias,
id. ib. 1, 2; Liv. 1, 24:
non alia ante Romana pugna atrocior fuit,
id. 1, 27; 2, 31; Tac. A. 6, 7 al.; cf. under aliter, 2. b. z.—Hence the advv.
A.
ălĭō, adv. (an old dat. form, designating direction to a place; cf.: eo, quo), elsewhither (arch.), elsewhere, to another place, person, or thing, allose (class., esp. among poets; but not found in Lucr. or Juv.).
1.
In gen.
a.
Of place:
fortasse tu profectus alio fueras,
Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 49:
ut ab Norba alio traducerentur,
Liv. 32, 2:
translatos alio maerebis amores,
Hor. Epod. 15, 23:
decurrens alio,
id. S. 2, 1, 32:
nam frustra vitium vitaveris illud, Si te alio pravum detorseris,
id. ib. 2, 2, 55.—With quo:
Arpinumne mihi eundum sit, an quo alio,
to some other place, Cic. Att. 9, 17:
si quando Romam aliove quo mitterent legatos,
Liv. 38, 30. —
b.
Of persons or things (cf. alias, alibi, alicunde, etc.):
illi suum animum alio conferunt,
Ter. Heaut. 2, 4, 10 (cf. Plaut. Merc. 2, 2, 62:
ne ad illam me animum adjecisse sentiat): ne quando iratus tu alio conferas,
id. Eun. 3, 1, 60 Don.:
hi narrata ferunt alio,
Ov. M. 12, 57: tamen vocat me alio ( to another subject) jam dudum tacita vestra exspectatio, Cic. Clu. 23, 63; id. Verr. 2, 1, 53, § 139:
sed, si placet, sermonem alio transferamus,
id. de Or. 1, 29, 133:
quoniam alio properare tempus monet,
Sall. J. 19, 2; so Tac. A. 1, 18 al.—
c.
Of purpose or design:
appellet haec desideria naturae: cupiditatis nomen servet alio,
for another purpose, Cic. Fin. 2, 9, 27:
hoc longe alio spectabat,
looked quite elsewhere, had a far different design, Nep. Them. 6, 3.—
2.
a.. Alio... alio, in one way... in another; hither... thither, = huc... illuc:
hic (i. e. in ea re) alio res familiaris, alio ducit humanitas,
Cic. Off. 3, 23, 89: alio atque alio, in one way and another:
nihil alio atque alio spargitur,
Sen. Brev. Vit. 11, 2.—
b.
Alius alio, each in a different way, one in one way, another in another:
et ceteri quidem alius alio,
Cic. Off. 3, 20, 80:
aliud alio dissipavit,
id. Div. 1, 34, 76; so Liv. 2, 54, 9; 7, 39.—So, aliunde alio, from one place to another:
quassatione terrae aliunde alio (aquae) transferuntur,
Sen. Q. N. 3, 11, 1; cf. aliunde.—
c.
Like alius or aliter with a negative and the particles of comparison quam or atque;
in questions with nisi: plebem nusquam alio natam quam ad serviendum,
for nothing but, Liv. 7, 18, 7: non alio datam summam quam in emptionem, etc., * Suet. Aug. 98 Ruhnk.:
quo alio nisi ad nos confugerent?
Liv. 39, 36, 11; cf. Hand, Turs. I. pp. 232-234.—
B.
ălĭā, adv. (sc. via), in another way, in a different manner (in the whole ante-class. and class. per. dub.); for in Plaut. Rud. prol. 10, aliuta has been proposed; in Lucr. 6, 986, Lachm. reads alio; in Liv. 21, 56, 2, Weissenb. alibi; and in id. 44, 43, 2, via may be supplied from the preced. context; certain only in Don. ad Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 5; cf. Hand, Turs. I. p. 219.—
C.
ălĭās, adv. (acc. to Prisc. 1014 P., and Corss. Ausspr. I. p. 769, an acc. form like foras; but acc. to Herz. ad Caes. B. G. 5, 57, and Hab. Syn. 79, old gen. like paterfamili as, Alcmen as, etc. In the ante-class. per. rare; only once in Plaut., twice in Ter., twice in Varro; in the class. per. most freq. in Cic., but only three times in his orations; also in Plin.).
1.
Of time, at a time other than the present, whether it be in the past or (more freq.) in the future.
a.
At another time, at other times, on another occasion (alias: temporis adverbium, quod Graeci allote, aliter allôs, Capitol. Orth. 2242 P.; cf.
Herz. and Hab., as cited above): alias ut uti possim causa hac integra,
Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 4; so id. And. 3, 2, 49 (alias = alio tempore, Don.):
sed alias jocabimur,
Cic. Fam. 7, 13, 2:
sed plura scribemus alias,
id. ib. 7, 6:
et alias et in consulatus petitione vinci,
id. Planc. 18:
nil oriturum alias,
Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 17.—In the future, freq. in contrast with nunc, in praesentia, tum, hactenus:
recte secusne, alias viderimus,
Cic. Ac. 2, 44, 135:
Hactenus haec: alias justum sit necne poema, Nunc, etc.,
Hor. S. 1, 4, 63: sed haec alias pluribus;
nunc, etc.,
Cic. Div. 2, 2 fin.; Liv. 44, 36 fin.: quare placeat, alias ostendemus; in praesentia, etc., Auct. ad Her. 3, 16, 28.—In the past:
gubernatores alias imperare soliti, tum metu mortis jussa exsequebantur,
Curt. 4, 3, 18:
alias bellare inter se solitos, tunc periculi societas junxerat,
id. 9, 4, 15.—Freq. with advv. of time;
as numquam, umquam, and the like: si umquam in dicendo fuimus aliquid, aut etiam si numquam alias fuimus, tum profecto, etc.,
Cic. Att. 4, 2, 2:
consilio numquam alias dato,
Hor. C. 3, 5, 45:
numquam ante alias,
Liv. 2, 22, 7:
non umquam alias ante tantus terror senatum invasit,
id. 2, 9, 5; 1, 28, 4:
si quando umquam ante alias,
id. 32, 5 (where the four advv. of time are to be taken together):
Saturnalibus et si quando alias libuisset, modo munera dividebat,
Suet. Aug. 75.—
b.
Alias... alias, as in Gr. allote... allote; allote men... allote de, at one time... at another; once... another time; sometimes... sometimes; now... now:
Alias me poscit pro illa triginta minas, Alias talentum magnum,
Plaut. Curc. 1, 1, 63; so Varr. L. L. 8, § 76 Mull.; id. R. R. 2, 1, 15; Cic. Verr. 1, 46, 120:
nec potest quisquam alias beatus esse, alias miser,
id. Fin. 2, 27, 87:
contentius alias, alias summissius,
id. de Or. 3, 55, 212:
cum alias bellum inferrent, alias inlatum defenderent,
Caes. B. G. 2, 29; so id. ib. 5, 57 al.; it occurs four times in successive clauses in Cic. Inv. 1, 52, 99.—Sometimes plerumque, saepe, aliquando, interdum stand in corresponding clauses:
nec umquam sine usura reddit (terra), quod accepit, sed alias minore, plerumque majore cum foenore,
Cic. Sen. 15, 51:
geminatio verborum habet interdum vim, leporem alias,
id. de Or. 3, 54, 206:
hoc alias fastidio, alias contumacia, saepius imbecillitate, evenit,
Plin. 16, 32, 58, § 134; 7, 15, 13, § 63.—Sometimes one alias is omitted:
illi eruptione tentata alias cuniculis ad aggerem actis, etc.,
Caes. B. G. 3, 21; Plin. 26, 3, 7, § 13.—
c.
Alias aliter, alias alius, etc. (cf. alius), at one time in one way... at another in another; now so... now otherwise; now this... now that:
et alias aliter haec in utramque partem causae solent convenire,
Cic. Inv. 2, 13, 45:
alii enim sunt, alias nostrique familiares fere demortui,
id. Att. 16, 11 (Madv. interprets this of time):
illi alias aliud iisdem de rebus judicant,
id. de Or. 2, 7, 30; id. Or. 59, 200:
(deos) non semper eosdem atque alias alios solemus venerari,
id. Red. in Sen. 30:
ut iidem versus alias in aliam rem posse accommodari viderentur,
id. Div. 2, 54, 111.—
d.
Saepe alias or alias saepe... nunc, nuper, quondam, etc.;
also: cum saepe alias... tum, etc. (very common in Cic.): quod cum saepe alias tum nuper, etc.,
Cic. Tusc. 4, 4, 7:
fecimus et alias saepe et nuper in Tusculano,
id. ib. 5, 4, 11:
quibus de rebus et alias saepe... et quondam in Hortensii villa,
id. Ac. 2, 3, 9:
quorum pater et saepe alias et maxime censor saluti rei publicae fuit,
id. de Or. 1, 9, 38:
cum saepe alias, tum apud centumviros,
id. Brut. 39, 144:
cum saepe alias, tum Pyrrhi bello,
id. Off. 3, 22, 86; 3, 11, 47:
neque tum solum, sed saepe alias,
Nep. Hann. 11, 7.—In comparative sentences rare:
nunc tamen libentius quam saepe alias,
Symm. Ep. 1, 90.—So,
e.
Semper alias, always at other times or in other cases (apparently only post-Aug.): et super cenam autem et semper alias communissimus, multa joco transigebat. Suet. Vesp. 22; id. Tib. 18; Gell. 15, 1.—
f.
Raro alias, rarely at other times, on other occasions:
ut raro alias quisquam tanto favore est auditus,
Liv. 45, 20; 3, 69; Tac. H. 1, 89.—
g.
Non alias, at no other time, never, = numquam (a choice poet. expression, often imitated by [p. 92] the histt.):
non alias caelo ceciderunt plura sereno Fulgura,
never at any other time did so much lightning fall from a clear sky, Verg. G. 1, 487:
non alias militi familiarior dux fuit,
Liv. 7, 33; 45, 7:
non alias majore mole concursum,
Tac. A. 2, 46; 4. 69;
11, 31: non sane alias exercitatior Britannia fuit,
id. Agr. 5:
haud alias intentior populus plus vocis permisit,
id. A. 3, 11, and 15, 46; Suet. Tit. 8; Flor. 3, 6.—
2.
Of place, at another place, elsewhere; or in respect of other things, in other circumstances, otherwise (only post-Aug.; v. Madv. ad Cic. Fin. 1, 3, 7):
Idaeus rubus appellatus est, quoniam in Ida, non alias, nascitur,
Plin. 24, 14, 75, § 123 (Jan, alius): nusquam alias tam torrens fretum, * Just. 4, 1, 9:
sicut vir alias doctissimus Cornutus existimat,
Macr. S. 5, 19.—
3.
Alias for alioqui (only post-Aug.), to indicate that something is in a different condition in one instance, not in others, except that, for the rest, otherwise:
in Silaro non virgulta modo immersa, verum et folia lapidescunt, alias salubri potu ejus aquae,
Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 224; so id. 18, 6, 7, § 37; 19, 8, 48, § 163; 25, 2, 6, § 16 al.—
4.
Non alias quam, for no other reason, on no other condition, in no other circumstances than, not other than; and non alias nisi, on no other condition, not otherwise, except (prob. taken from the lang. of common life):
non alias magis indoluisse Caesarem ferunt quam quod, etc.,
Tac. A. 3, 73:
debilitatum vulnere jacuisse non alias quam simulatione mortis tutiorem,
by nothing safer than by feigning death, Curt. 8, 1, 24; 8, 14, 16; Dig. 29, 7, 6, § 2: non alias ( on no other condition) existet heres ex substitutione nisi, etc., ib. 28, 6, 8; 23, 3, 37, 23, 3, 29.—
5.
Alias like aliter, in another manner; flrst in the Lat. of the jurists (cf. Suet. Tib. 71 Oud.; Liv. 21, 56, 2 Drak.; Ter. And. 3, 2, 49 Ruhnk.), Dig. 33, 8, 8, § 8; cf. Hand, Turs. I. pp. 219-227. —
D.
ălĭtĕr, adv. [alis; v. alius init. ], otherwise, in another manner, allôs.
1.
With comparative-clause expressed; constr. both affirm. and neg. without distinction.
a.
With atque, ac, quam, and rarely ut, otherwise than, different from what, etc., Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 23:
sed aliter atque ostenderam facio,
Cic. Fam. 2, 3, 4; Ter. Ad. 4, 3, 6:
aliter ac nos vellemus,
Cic. Mil. 9, 23:
de quo tu aliter sentias atque ego,
id. Fin. 4, 22, 60; id. Att. 6, 3:
si aliter nos faciant quam aequum est,
Plaut. Stich. 1, 1, 42:
si aliter quippiam coacti faciant quam libere,
Cic. Rab. Post. 11, 29; id. Verr. 2, 1, 19, § 24; id. Inv. 2, 22, 66:
Sed si aliter ut dixi accidisset, qui possem queri?
id. Rep. 1, 4, 7.—
b.
Non (or haud) aliter, not otherwise (per litoten), = just as; with quam si, ac si, quam cum, quam, exactly, just as if:
Non aliter quam si ruat omnis Karthago,
Verg. A. 4, 669:
dividor haud aliter quam si mea membra relinquam,
Ov. Tr. 1, 3, 73:
nihil in senatu actum aliter quam si, etc.,
Liv. 23, 4; 21, 63, 9:
illi negabant se aliter ituros quam si, etc.,
id. 3, 51, 12:
nec aliter quam si mihi tradatur, etc., Quint. prooem. 5: ut non aliter ratio constet quam si uni reddatur,
Tac. A. 1, 6; 1, 49:
Non aliter quam si fecisset Juno maritum Insanum,
Juv. 6, 619; Suet. Aug. 40:
non aliter quam cum, etc.,
Ov. F. 2, 209; so id. M. 2, 623; 4, 348; 6, 516 al.:
nec scripsi aliter ac si, etc.,
Cic. Att. 13, 51; Suet. Oth. 6; Col. 2, 14 (15), 8:
Non aliter quam qui lembum subigit,
Verg. G. 1, 201:
non aliter praeformidat quam qui ferrum medici, priusquam curetur, aspexit,
Quint. 4, 5, 5; so id. 4, 5, 22; 2, 5, 11:
neque aliter quam ii, qui traduntur, etc.,
id. 5, 8, 1:
patere inde aliquid decrescere, non aliter quam Institor hibernae tegetis,
Juv. 7, 220:
successorem non aliter quam indicium mortis accepturum,
Tac. A. 6, 30.—
* c.
Aliter ab aliquo (analog. to alius with the abl., and alienus with ab), differently from any one:
cultores regionum multo aliter a ceteris agunt,
Mel. 1, 9, 6.—
d.
Non ali ter nisi, by no other means, on no other condition, not otherwise, except:
qui aliter obsistere fato fatetur se non potuisse, nisi etc.,
Cic. Fat. 20, 48; id. Fam. 1, 9: non pati C. Caesarem consulem aliter fieri, nisi exercitum et provincias tradiderit, Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 14; so Lentulus ap. Cic. Fam. 12, 14, 18; Liv. 35, 39; 45, 11; 38; Tac. Or. 32; Just. 12, 14, 7; Suet. Ner. 36; Dig. 37, 9, 6; 48, 18, 9. —
e.
Non aliter quam ut, on no other condition than that:
neque aliter poterit palos, ad quos perducitur, pertingere, quam ut diffluat,
Col. Arb. 7, 5; so Suet. Tib. 15; 24; id. Galb. 8; Curt. 9, 5, 23.—
2.
Without a comparative clause expressed.
a.
In gen., otherwise, in another manner, in other respects; and in the poets: haud aliter (per litoten), just so:
vale atque salve, etsi aliter ut dicam meres,
though you deserve that I speak differently, Plaut. Capt. 3, 5, 86 Brix:
tu si aliter existimes, nihil errabis,
Cic. Fam. 3, 7, 16:
ut eadem ab utrisque dicantur, aliter dicuntur,
in a different sense, Plin. Pan. 72, 7:
Si quis aliter docet,
Vulg. 1 Tim. 6, 3:
quae aliter se habent,
ib. ib. 5, 25:
Quippe aliter tunc vivebant homines,
Juv. 6, 11: quod uterque nostrum his etiam ex studiis notus, quibus aliter ignotus est, otherwise, i. e. personally, unknown, Plin. Ep. 9, 23, 3.—With negatives:
non fuit faciendum aliter,
Cic. Att. 6, 9; Tac. A. 15, 68:
Ergo non aliter poterit dormire?
Juv. 3, 281:
aliter haud facile eos ad tantum negotium impelli posse,
Sall. C. 44, 1; Curt. 8, 10, 27:
haud aliter Rutulo muros et castra tuenti Ignescunt irae (the comparison of the wolf precedes),
Verg. A. 9, 65:
haud aliter (i. e. like a wild beast) juvenis medios moriturus in hostes Irruit,
id. ib. 9, 554 al.; Ov. M. 8, 473; 9, 642:
non aliter (i. e. than I) Samio dicunt arsisse Bathyllo Anacreonta Teium,
Hor. Epod. 14, 10:
neque Mordaces aliter (i. e. than by means of wine) diffugiunt sollicitudines,
id. C. 1, 18, 4:
neque exercitum Romanum aliter transmissurum,
Tac. H. 5, 19:
nec aliter expiari potest,
Vulg. Num. 35, 33. —So, fieri aliter non potest or fieri non potest aliter (not fieri non aliter potest): nihil agis;
Fieri aliter non potest,
Ter. Ad. 5, 8, 13: assentior;
fieri non potuit aliter,
Cic. Att. 6, 6.—
b.
Esp.
(α).
Pregn., otherwise, in the contrary manner: Pe. Servos Epidicus dixit mihi. Ph. Quid si servo aliter visum est? i. e. if he does not speak the truth? Plaut. Ep. 4, 2, 29:
verum aliter evenire multo intellegit,
Ter. And. prol. 4 (aliter autem contra significat, Don.):
amplis cornibus et nigris potius quam aliter,
Varr. R. R. 1, 20, 1: ne aliter quid eveniat, providere de cet, otherwise than harmoniously, Sall. J. 10, 7:
dis aliter visum,
Verg. A. 2, 428:
sin aliter tibi videtur,
Vulg. Num. 11, 15: adversi... saevaque circuitu curvantem bracchia longo Scorpion atque aliter ( in the opposite direction) curvantem bracchia Cancrum, Ov. M. 2, 83: aliterque ( and in the opposite course) secante jam pelagus rostro, Luc. 8, 197.—Hence, qui aliter fecerit, who will not do that:
neu quis de his postea ad senatum referat, neve cum populo agat: qui aliter fecerit, etc.,
Sall. C. 51, 43; Just. 6, 6, 1; cf. Brisson. de Form. p. 200, and de Verb. Signif. p. 66.—
(β).
Aliter esse, to be of a different nature, differently constituted or disposed:
sed longe aliter est amicus atque amator,
Plaut. Truc. 1, 2, 70: ego hunc esse aliter credidi: iste me fefellit;
ego isti nihilo sum aliter ac fui,
Ter. Phorm. 3, 2, 44; id. Ad. 3, 4, 46; Cic. Rosc. Am. 47, 137.—
(γ).
For alioqui (q. v. II. C.), otherwise, else, in any other case:
jus enim semper est quaesitum aequabile: neque enim aliter esset jus (and just after: nam aliter justitia non esset),
Cic. Off. 2, 12, 42; 1, 39, 139; id. Lael. 20, 74:
si suos legatos recipere vellent, quos Athenas miserant, se remitterent, aliter illos numquam in patriam essent recepturi,
Nep. Them. 7 fin.:
aliter sine populi jussu nulli earum rerum consuli jus est,
Sall. C. 29, 3 Kritz:
aliter non viribus ullis Vincere poteris,
Verg. A. 6, 147:
veniam ostentantes, si praesentia sequerentur: aliter nihil spei,
Tac. H. 4, 59:
quoniam aliter non possem,
Vulg. Sap. 8, 21.—
(δ).
Like alius (q. v. II. A.) repeated even several times in a distributive manner, in one way... in another: sed aliter leges, aliter philosophi tollunt astutias. Cic. Off. 3, 17, 68; so id. ib. 1, 12, 38; id. Lael. 24, 89; id. Fam. 15, 21, 6:
aliter utimur propriis, aliter commodatis,
Tac. Or. 32:
Aliter catuli longe olent, aliter sues,
Plaut. Ep. 4, 2, 9:
aliter Diodoro, aliter Philoni, Chrysippo aliter placet,
id. Ac. 2, 47, 143:
idem illud aliter Caesar, aliter Cicero, aliter Cato suadere debebit,
Quint. 3, 8, 49: Et aliter acutis morbis medendum, aliter vetustis; aliter increscentibus, aliter subsistentibus, aliter jam ad sanitatem inclinatis, Cels. prooem. p. 10.—
(ε).
With alius or its derivatives, one in one way, another in another (v. alius, II. B.):
quoniam aliter ab aliis digeruntur,
Cic. de Or. 2, 19, 79; id. Att. 7, 8; Liv. 2, 21; so id. 39, 53:
hoc ex locorum occasione aliter alibi decernitur,
Plin. 18, 5, 6, § 30; so id. 25, 4, 10, § 29.—
(ζ).
Non aliter, analog. to non alius (v. alius, II. H.) with a comp. (only in Plin.):
non aliter utilius id fieri putare quam, etc.,
Plin. 37, 2, 10, § 28:
idque non aliter clarius intellegi potest,
id. 37, 4, 15, § 59; so id. 22, 22, 36, § 78; 24, 11, 50, § 85; 28, 9, 41, § 148; cf. Hand, Turs. I. pp. 267-276.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > alius

6 AT

I) prep.

A. with dative.

I. Of motion;

1) towards, against;

Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;

hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;

2) close atup to;

Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;

þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;

3) to, at;

koma at landi, to come to land;

ganga at dómi, to go into court;

4) along (= eptir);

ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;

dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;

refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;

5) denoting hostility;

renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;

gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;

6) around;

vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;

bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;

7) denoting business, engagement;

ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;

fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.

II. Of position, &c.;

1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;

at kirkju, at church;

at dómi, in court;

at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;

2) denoting participation in;

vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;

vera at vígi, to be an accessory in man-slaying;

3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;

kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;

var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;

4) with proper names of places (farms);

konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;

biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;

at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;

5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;

at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;

at Marðar, at Mara’s home;

at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;

at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).

III. Of time;

1) at, in;

at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;

at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;

at páskum, at Easter;

at kveldi, at eventide;

at þinglausnum, at the close of the Assembly;

at fjöru, at the ebb;

at flœðum, at the floodtide;

2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;

at ári komanda, next year;

at vári, er kemr, next spring;

generally with ‘komanda’ understood;

at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;

3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;

at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;

at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;

at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;

at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;

at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;

at honum önduðum, after his death;

4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;

hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;

skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;

at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.

IV. fig. and in various uses;

1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;

brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;

verða at ormi, to become a snake;

2) for, as;

gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;

eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;

3) by;

taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;

draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;

kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;

4) as regards as to;

auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;

vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;

5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;

ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;

6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;

faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);

aðili at sök = aðili sakar;

7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;

hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;

mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;

tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;

kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;

8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;

Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);

þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;

hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;

9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);

at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;

at landslögum, by the law of the land;

at vánum, as was to be expected;

at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;

10) in adverbial phrases;

gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;

bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;

at fullu, fully;

at vísu, surely;

at frjálsu, freely;

at eilífu, for ever and ever;

at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;

at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;

at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.

B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);

sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;

eiga féránsdóm at e-n, to hold a court of execution upon a person;

at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;

connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;

at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.

II)

1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;

at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;

2) in an objective sense;

hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;

gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;

3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).

III)

1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;

hón grét at meir, she wept the more;

þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;

þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;

2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);

þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;

sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.

IV)

conj., that;

1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;

þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;

vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;

2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;

svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;

3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);

4) since, because, as (= því at);

5) connected with þó, því, svá;

þó at (with subj.), though, although;

því at, because, for;

svá at, so that;

6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;

þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;

þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;

áðr at (= á. en), before;

7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;

Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;

in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.

V)

negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.

VI)

n. an incited conflict or fight ( see etja);

odda at, Yggs at, battle.

* * *

1.

and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.

Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.

WITH DAT.

A. LOC.

I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:

1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.

2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.

3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)

4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.

5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.

β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.

6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.

β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.

γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.

7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.

β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.

8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.

β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.

II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.

2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.

3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:

α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.

β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.

γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.

4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.

5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.

6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.

β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.

γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.

7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.

B. TEMP.

I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.

II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.

β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.

III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:

1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,

2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.

IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:

1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.

2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.

3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.

V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.

2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.

C. METAPH. and in various cases:

I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:

α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.

β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.

II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.

2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.

III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.

IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.

2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)

3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.

4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.

5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.

6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.

β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.

V. denoting the source of a thing:

1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.

2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.

VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.

VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.

VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.

β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.

IX. following many words:

1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.

β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …

γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.

δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.

2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.

3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.

WITH ACC.

TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.

☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.

2.

and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.

I. it is used either,

1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,

2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.

β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).

3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.

II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:

α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.

β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.

γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.

δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.

ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.

ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.

η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.

θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.

3.

and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.

I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.

II. it is used,

1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.

2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.

β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.

γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.

III. used in connection with conjunctions,

1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.

α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.

β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.

γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.

2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.

IV. as a relat. conj.:

1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.

2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.

V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.

4.

and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.

5.

n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.

β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.

6.

the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

7 σμῖλαξ

σμῖλαξ

Grammatical information: f. (m.)

Meaning: `Taxus baccata, common yew tree', also name of an ivy-like weed and a leguminous plant (Att., hell.), in Arcadia name of an oak, `Quercus ilex' (Thphr.);

Other forms: OAtt. μῖλαξ, - ακος; also μῖλος (Cratin., Thphr.), σμῖλος (Call., Nic., Dsc.) m. `taxus'.

Dialectal forms: Myc. mira₂ has been connected as *(σ)μῑλία, materail of which a table is made.

Derivatives: σμιλάκ-ινος (Poll.), - ειος (Theognost.) `made of yew'.

Origin: PG [a word of Pre-Greek origin]

Etymology: With ( σ)μῖλαξ: ( σ)μῖλος cf. οἶσαξ: οἶσος, ὀρόβαξ: ὄροβος. No etymology. Against relation with σμίλη (Prellwitz, Bq and Hofmann Et. Wb. as uncertain hypothesis) speak esp. the OAtt. forms μῖλαξ and μῖλος. - The variation proves a Pre-Greek word (Furnée 390).

Page in Frisk: 2,749

Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > σμῖλαξ

8 ἐν

ἐν prep. w. dat. (Hom.+). For lit. s. ἀνά and εἰς, beg. For special NT uses s. AOepke, TW II 534–39. The uses of this prep. are so many and various, and oft. so easily confused, that a strictly systematic treatment is impossible. It must suffice to list the main categories, which will help establish the usage in individual cases. The earliest auditors/readers, not being inconvenienced by grammatical and lexical debates, would readily absorb the context and experience little difficulty.

① marker of a position defined as being in a location, in, among (the basic idea, Rob. 586f)

ⓐ of the space or place within which someth. is found, in: ἐν τῇ πόλει Lk 7:37. ἐν Βηθλέεμ Mt 2:1. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 3:1 (Just., D. 19, 5, cp. A I, 12, 6 ἐν ἐρημίᾳ) ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ Ac 5:42. ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Ti 3:15 and very oft. ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house Lk 2:49 and perh. Mt 20:15 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302, C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός; PTebt 12, 3; POxy 523, 3; Tob 6:11 S; Goodsp., Probs. 81–83). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ Mt 20:3. ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ in heaven (Arat., Phaen. 10; Diod S 4, 61, 6; Plut., Mor. 359d τὰς ψυχὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ λάμπειν ἄστρα; Tat. 12, 2 τὰ ἄστρα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ) Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3); Rv 12:1; IEph 19:2.—W. quotations and accounts of the subject matter of literary works: in (Ps.-Demetr. c. 226 ὡς ἐν τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ; Simplicius in Epict. p. 28, 37 ἐν τῷ Φαίδωνι; Ammon. Hermiae in Aristot. De Interpret. c. 9 p. 136, 20 Busse ἐν Τιμαίῳ παρειλήφαμεν=we have received as a tradition; 2 Macc 2:4; 1 Esdr 1:40; 5:48; Sir 50:27; Just., A I, 60, 1 ἐν τῷ παρὰ Πλάτωνι Τιμαίῳ) ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9. ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Lk 24:44; J 1:45. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις Ac 13:40. ἐν Ἠλίᾳ in the story of Elijah Ro 11:2 (Just., D. 120, 3 ἐν τῷ Ἰούδα). ἐν τῷ Ὡσηέ 9:25 (Just., D. 44, 2 ἐν τῷ Ἰεζεκιήλ). ἐν Δαυίδ in the Psalter ( by David is also prob.: s. 6) Hb 4:7. ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ in another prophet B 6:14. Of inner life φανεροῦσθαι ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσι be made known to (your) consciences 2 Cor 5:11. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Mt 5:28; 13:19; 2 Cor 11:12 et al.

ⓑ on ἐν τῷ ὄρει (X., An. 4, 3, 31; Diod S 14, 16, 2 λόφος ἐν ᾧ=a hill on which; Jos., Ant. 12, 259; Just., D. 67, 9 ἐν ὄρει Χωρήβ) J 4:20f; Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ in the market Mt 20:3. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mt 5:25. ἐν πλαξίν on tablets 2 Cor 3:3. ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν on the street corners Mt 6:5.

ⓒ within the range of, at, near (Soph., Fgm. 37 [34 N.²] ἐν παντὶ λίθῳ=near every stone; Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 19 ἐν Τύρῳ=near Tyre; Polyaenus 8, 24, 7 ἐν τῇ νησῖδι=near the island; Diog. L. 1, 34; 85; 97 τὰ ἐν ποσίν=what is before one’s feet; Jos., Vi. 227 ἐν Χαβωλώ) ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακείῳ (q.v.) J 8:20. ἐν τῷ Σιλωάμ near the pool of Siloam Lk 13:4. καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τινος sit at someone’s right hand (cp. 1 Esdr 4:29) Eph 1:20; Hb 1:3; 8:1.

ⓓ among, in (Hom.+; PTebt 58, 41 [111 B.C.]; Sir 16:6; 31:9; 1 Macc 4:58; 5:2; TestAbr B 9 p. 13, 27 [Stone p. 74]; Just., A I, 5, 4 ἐν βαρβάροις) ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ in the generation now living Mk 8:38. ἐν τῷ γένει μου among my people Gal 1:14 (Just., D. 51, 1 al. ἐν τῷ γένει ὑμῶν). ἐν ἡμῖν Hb 13:26. ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ in the crowd Mk 5:30 (cp. Sir 7:7). ἐν ἀλλήλοις mutually (Thu. 1, 24, 4; Just., D. 101, 3) Ro 1:12; 15:5. ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν (=among the commanding officers: Diod S 18, 61, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 21 §84) Ἰούδα Mt 2:6 et al. ἐν ἀνθρώποις among people (as Himerius, Or. 48 [14], 11; Just., A I, 23, 3, D. 64, 7) Lk 2:14; cp. Ac 4:12.

ⓔ before, in the presence of, etc. (cp. Od. 2, 194; Eur., Andr. 359; Pla., Leg. 9, 879b; Demosth. 24, 207; Polyb. 5, 39, 6; Epict. 3, 22, 8; Appian, Maced. 18 §2 ἐν τοῖς φίλοις=in the presence of his friends; Sir 19:8; Jdth 6:2; PPetr. II, 4 [6], 16 [255/254 B.C.] δινὸν γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλῳ ἀτιμάζεσθαι=before a crowd) σοφίαν λαλοῦμεν ἐν τοῖς τελείοις in the presence of mature (i.e. spiritually sophisticated) adults 1 Cor 2:6 (cp. Simplicius in Epict. p. 131, 20 λέγειν τὰ θεωρήματα ἐν ἰδιώταις). ἐν τ. ὠσὶν ὑμῶν in your hearing Lk 4:21 (cp. Judg 17:2; 4 Km 23:2; Bar 1:3f), where the words can go linguistically just as well w. πεπλήρωται as w. ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη (this passage of scripture read in your hearing). ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος in someone’s eyes, i.e. judgment (Wsd 3:2; Sir 8:16; Jdth 3:4; 12:14; 1 Macc 1:12) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:23). ἔν τινι in the same mng. as early as Trag. (Soph., Oed. C. 1213 ἐν ἐμοί=in my judgment, Ant. 925 ἐν θεοῖς καλά; also Pla., Prot. 337b; 343c) ἐν ἐμοί 1 Cor 14:11; possibly J 3:21 (s. 4c below) and Jd 1 belong here.—In the ‘forensic’ sense ἔν τινι can mean in someone’s court or forum (Soph., Ant. 459; Pla., Gorg. 464d, Leg. 11, 916b; Ael. Aristid. 38, 3 K.=7 p. 71 D.; 46 p. 283, 334 D.; Diod S 19, 51, 4; Ps.-Heraclit., Ep. 4, 6; but in several of these pass. the mng. does not go significantly beyond ‘in the presence of’ [s. above]) ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Cor 6:2 ( by you is also tenable; s. 6 below).

ⓕ esp. to describe certain processes, inward: ἐν ἑαυτῷ to himself, i.e. in silence, διαλογίζεσθαι Mk 2:8; Lk 12:17; διαπορεῖν Ac 10:17; εἰδέναι J 6:61; λέγειν Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 7:49; εἰπεῖν 7:39 al.; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι J 11:38.

② marker of a state or condition, in

ⓐ of being clothed and metaphors assoc. with such condition in, with (Hdt. 2, 159; X., Mem. 3, 11, 4; Diod S 1, 12, 9; Herodian 2, 13, 3; Jdth 10:3; 1 Macc 6:35; 2 Macc 3:33) ἠμφιεσμένον ἐν μαλακοῖς dressed in soft clothes Mt 11:8. περιβάλλεσθαι ἐν ἱματίοις Rv 3:5; 4:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων come in sheep’s clothing Mt 7:15. περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς walk about in long robes Mk 12:38 (Tat. 2, 1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν); cp. Ac 10:30; Mt 11:21; Lk 10:13. ἐν λευκοῖς in white (Artem. 2, 3; 4, 2 ἐν λευκοῖς προϊέναι; Epict. 3, 22, 1) J 20:12; Hv 4, 2, 1. Prob. corresp. ἐν σαρκί clothed in flesh (cp. Diod S 1, 12, 9 deities appear ἐν ζῴων μορφαῖς) 1 Ti 3:16; 1J 4:2; 2J 7. ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ in all his glory Mt 6:29 (cp. 1 Macc 10:86). ἐν τ. δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός clothed in his Father’s glory 16:27; cp. 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:31.

ⓑ of other states and conditions (so freq. w. γίνομαι, εἰμί; Attic wr.; PPetr II, 11 [1], 8 [III B.C.] γράφε, ἵνα εἰδῶμεν ἐν οἷς εἶ; 39 [g], 16; UPZ 110, 176 [164 B.C.] et al.; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 2 πάλιν ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ γενέσθαι; 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι; Tat. 20, 1f οὐκ ἔστι γὰρ ἄπειρος ὁ οὐρανός, … πεπερασμένος δὲ καὶ ἐν τέρματι; Mel., HE 4, 26, 6 ἐν … λεηλασίᾳ ‘plundering’): ὑπάρχων ἐν βασάνοις Lk 16:23. ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1J 3:14. ἐν ζωῇ Ro 5:10. ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς Phlm 13 (Just., A II, 2, 11 ἐν δ. γενέσθαι). ἐν πειρασμοῖς 1 Pt 1:6; ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκός Ro 8:3. ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Th 2:2. ἐν φθορᾷ in a state of corruptibility 1 Cor 15:42. ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν 2 Cor 10:6 (cp. PEleph 10, 7 [223/222 B.C.] τ. λοιπῶν ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ὄντων; PGen 76, 8; 3 Macc 5:8); ἐν ἐκστάσει in a state of trance Ac 11:5 (opp. Just., D, 115, 3 ἐν καταστάσει ὤν). Of qualities: ἐν πίστει κ. ἀγάπῃ κ. ἁγιασμῷ 1 Ti 2:15; ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ Tit 3:3; ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2; ἐν εὐσεβείᾳ καὶ σεμνότητι 1 Ti 2:2; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:26; ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7; ἐν δόξῃ Phil 4:19.

③ marker of extension toward a goal that is understood to be within an area or condition, into: ἐν is somet. used w. verbs of motion where εἰς would normally be expected (Diod S 23, 8, 1 Ἄννων ἐπέρασε ἐν Σικελίᾳ; Hero I 142, 7; 182, 4; Paus. 7, 4, 3 διαβάντες ἐν τῇ Σάμῳ; Epict. 1, 11, 32; 2, 20, 33; Aelian, VH 4, 18; Vett. Val. 210, 26; 212, 6 al., s. index; Pel.-Leg. 1, 4; 5; 2, 1; PParis 10, 2 [145 B.C.] ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ; POxy 294, 4; BGU 22, 13; Tob 5:5 BA; 1 Macc 10:43; TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 23=Stone p. 60 [s. on the LXX Thackeray 25]; πέμψον αὐτοὺς ἐν πολέμῳ En 10:9; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 22 [Stone p. 14] δάκρυα … ἐν τῷ νιπτῆρι πίπτοντα): εἰσέρχεσθαι Lk 9:46; Rv 11:11; ἀπάγειν GJs 6:1; ἀνάγειν 7:1; εἰσάγειν 10:1; καταβαίνειν J 5:3 (4) v.l.; ἀναβαίνειν GJs 22:13; ἀπέρχεσθαι (Diod S 23, 18, 5) Hs 1:6; ἥκειν GJs 5:1; ἀποστέλλειν 25:1. To be understood otherwise: ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ the word went out = spread in all Judaea Lk 7:17; likew. 1 Th 1:8. The metaphorical expr. ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων turn the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Lk 1:17 is striking but consistent w. the basic sense of ἐν. S. also γίνομαι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, καλέω, and τίθημι. ἐν μέσῳ among somet. answers to the question ‘whither’ (B-D-F §215, 3) Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 8:7.

④ marker of close association within a limit, in

ⓐ fig., of pers., to indicate the state of being filled w. or gripped by someth.: in someone=in one’s innermost being ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα in him dwells all the fullness Col 2:9. ἐν αὐτῷ ἐκτίσθη τὰ πάντα (prob. to be understood as local, not instrumental, since ἐν αὐ. would otherwise be identical w. διʼ αὐ. in the same vs.) everything was created in association with him 1:16 (cp. M. Ant. 4, 23 ἐν σοὶ πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; AFeuillet, NTS 12, ’65, 1–9). ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν your life is hid in God 3:3; cp. 2:3. Of sin in humans Ro 7:17f; cp. κατεργάζεσθαι vs. 8. Of Christ who, as a spiritual being, fills people so as to be in charge of their lives 8:10; 2 Cor 13:5, abides J 6:56, lives Gal 2:20, and takes form 4:19 in them. Of the divine word: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1J 1:10; μένειν ἔν τινι J 5:38; ἐνοικεῖν Col 3:16. Of God’s spirit: οἰκεῖν (ἐνοικεῖν) ἔν τινι Ro 8:9, 11; 1 Cor 3:16; 2 Ti 1:14. Of spiritual gifts 1 Ti 4:14; 2 Ti 1:6. Of miraculous powers ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι be at work in someone Mt 14:2; Mk 6:14; ποιεῖν ἔν τινι εὐάρεστον Hb 13:21. The same expr. of God or evil spirits, who somehow work in people: 1 Cor 12:6; Phil 2:13; Eph 2:2 al.

ⓑ of the whole, w. which the parts are closely joined: μένειν ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ remain in the vine J 15:4. ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλὰ ἔχομεν in one body we have many members Ro 12:4. κρέμασθαι ἔν τινι depend on someth. Mt 22:40.

ⓒ esp. in Paul. or Joh. usage, to designate a close personal relation in which the referent of the ἐν-term is viewed as the controlling influence: under the control of, under the influence of, in close association with (cp. ἐν τῷ Δαυιδ εἰμί 2 Km 19:44): of Christ εἶναι, μένειν ἐν τῷ πατρί (ἐν τῷ θεῷ) J 10:38; 14:10f (difft. CGordon, ‘In’ of Predication or Equivalence: JBL 100, ’81, 612f); and of Christians 1J 3:24; 4:13, 15f; be or abide in Christ J 14:20; 15:4f; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρί 1J 2:24. ἔργα ἐν θεῷ εἰργασμένα done in communion with God J 3:21 (but s. 1e above).—In Paul the relation of the individual to Christ is very oft. expressed by such phrases as ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν κυρίῳ etc., also vice versa (FNeugebauer, NTS 4, ’57/58, 124–38; AWedderburn, JSNT 25, ’85, 83–97) ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός Gal 2:20, but here in the sense of a above.—See, e.g., Dssm., D. ntl. Formel ‘in Christo Jesu’ 1892; EWeber, D. Formel ‘in Chr. Jesu’ u. d. paul. Christusmystik: NKZ 31, 1920, 213ff; LBrun, Zur Formel ‘in Chr. Jesus’ im Phil: Symbolae Arctoae 1, 1922, 19–37; MHansen, Omkring Paulus-Formeln ‘i Kristus’: TK 4/10, 1929, 135–59; HBöhlig, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 170–75; OSchmitz, D. Christusgemeinschaft d. Pls² ’56; AWikenhauser, D. Christusmystik d. Pls² ’56; KMittring, Heilswirklichkeit b. Pls; Beitrag z. Verständnis der unio cum Christo in d. Plsbriefen 1929; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik d. Ap. Pls 1930 (Eng. tr., WMontgomery, The Myst. of Paul the Ap., ’31); WSchmauch, In Christus ’35; BEaston, Pastoral Ep. ’47, 210f; FBüchsel, ‘In Chr.’ b. Pls: ZNW 42, ’49, 141–58. Also HKorn, D. Nachwirkungen d. Christusmystik d. Pls in den Apost. Vätern, diss. Berlin 1928; EAndrews, Interpretation 6, ’52, 162–77; H-LParisius, ZNW 49, ’58, 285–88 (10 ‘forensic’ passages); JAllan, NTS 5, ’58/59, 54–62 (Eph), ibid. 10, ’63, 115–21 (pastorals); FNeugebauer, In Christus, etc. ’61; MDahl, The Resurrection of the Body ( 1 Cor 15) ’62, 110–13.—Paul has the most varied expressions for this new life-principle: life in Christ Ro 6:11, 23; love in Christ 8:39; grace, which is given in Christ 1 Cor 1:4; freedom in Chr. Gal 2:4; blessing in Chr. 3:14; unity in Chr. vs. 28. στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ stand firm in the Lord Phil 4:1; εὑρεθῆναι ἐν Χ. be found in Christ 3:9; εἶναι ἐν Χ. 1 Cor 1:30; οἱ ἐν Χ. Ro 8:1.—1 Pt 5:14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χ., ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 15:18.—Rv 14:13; ζῳοποιεῖσθαι 1 Cor 15:22.—The formula is esp. common w. verbs that denote a conviction, hope, etc. πεποιθέναι Gal 5:10; Phil 1:14; 2 Th 3:4. παρρησίαν ἔχειν Phlm 8. πέπεισμαι Ro 14:14. ἐλπίζειν Phil 2:19. καύχησιν ἔχειν Ro 15:17; 1 Cor 15:31. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. λαλεῖν 2 Cor 2:17; 12:19. ἀλήθειαν λέγειν Ro 9:1. λέγειν καὶ μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. But also apart fr. such verbs, in numerous pass. it is used w. verbs and nouns of the most varied sort, often without special emphasis, to indicate the scope within which someth. takes place or has taken place, or to designate someth. as being in close assoc. w. Christ, and can be rendered, variously, in connection with, in intimate association with, keeping in mind ἁγιάζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:2, or ἅγιος ἐν Χ. Phil 1:1; ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα 1 Cor 16:19. δικαιοῦσθαι Gal 2:17. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12. παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 4:1. προσδέχεσθαί τινα Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. χαίρειν 3:1; 4:4, 10. γαμηθῆναι ἐν κυρίῳ marry in the Lord=marry a Christian 1 Cor 7:39. προϊστάμενοι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ your Christian leaders (in the church) 1 Th 5:12 (but s. προί̈στημι 1 and 2).—εὐάρεστος Col 3:20. νήπιος 1 Cor 3:1. φρόνιμος 4:10. παιδαγωγοί vs. 15. ὁδοί vs. 17. Hence used in periphrasis for ‘Christian’ οἱ ὄντες ἐν κυρίῳ Ro 16:11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Χ. 2 Cor 12:2; αἱ ἐκκλησίαι αἱ ἐν Χ. Gal 1:22; 1 Th 2:14; νεκροὶ ἐν Χ. 4:16; ἐκλεκτός Ro 16:13. δόκιμος vs. 10. δέσμιος Eph 4:1. πιστὸς διάκονος 6:21; ἐν Χ. γεννᾶν τινα become someone’s parent in the Christian life 1 Cor 4:15. τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κυρίῳ 9:1.—The use of ἐν πνεύματι as a formulaic expression is sim.: ἐν πν. εἶναι be under the impulsion of the spirit, i.e. the new self, as opposed to ἐν σαρκί under the domination of the old self Ro 8:9; cp. ἐν νόμῳ 2:12. λαλεῖν speak under divine inspiration 1 Cor 12:3. ἐγενόμην ἐν πνεύματι I was in a state of inspiration Rv 1:10; 4:2; opp. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος came to himself Ac 12:11 (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 17 et al.).—The expr. ἐν πν. εἶναι is also used to express the idea that someone is under the special infl. of a good or even an undesirable spirit: Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; Lk 2:27; 1 Cor 12:3; Rv 17:3; 21:10. ἄνθρωπος ἐν πν. ἀκαθάρτῳ (ὤν) Mk 1:23 (s. GBjörck, ConNeot 7, ’42, 1–3).—ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖσθαι be in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19. οἱ ἐν νόμῳ those who are subject to the law Ro 3:19. ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ ἀποθνῄσκειν die because of a connection w. Adam 1 Cor 15:22.—On the formula ἐν ὀνόματι (Χριστοῦ) s. ὄνομα 1, esp. dγג. The OT is the source of the expr. ὀμνύναι ἔν τινι swear by someone or someth. (oft. LXX) Mt 5:34ff; 23:16, 18ff; Rv 10:6; παραγγέλλομέν σοι ἐν Ἰησοῦ Ac 19:14 v.l. The usage in ὁμολογεῖν ἔν τινι acknowledge someone Mt 10:32; Lk 12:8 (s. ὁμολογέω 4b) is Aramaic.

⑤ marker introducing means or instrument, with, a construction that begins w. Homer (many examples of instrumental ἐν in Radermacher’s edition of Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. p. 100; Reader, Polemo p. 258) but whose wide currency in our lit. is partly caused by the infl. of the LXX, and its similarity to the Hebr. constr. w. בְּ (B-D-F §219; Mlt. 104; Mlt-H. 463f; s. esp. M-M p. 210).

ⓐ it can serve to introduce persons or things that accompany someone to secure an objective: ‘along with’

α. pers., esp. of a military force, w. blending of associative (s. 4) and instrumental idea (1 Macc 1:17; 7:14, 28 al.): ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι meet, w. 10,000 men Lk 14:31 (cp. 1 Macc 4:6, 29 συνήντησεν αὐτοῖς Ἰούδας ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ἀνδρῶν). ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσιν αὐτοῦ Jd 14 (cp. Jdth 16:3 ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ).

β. impers. (oft. LXX; PTebt 41, 5 [c. 119 B.C.]; 16, 14 [114 B.C.]; 45, 17 al., where people rush into the village or the house ἐν μαχαίρῃ, ἐν ὅπλοις). (Just., D. 86, 6 τῆς ἀξίνης, ἐν ἧ πεπορευμένοι ἦσαν … κόψαι ξύλα) ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔρχεσθαι come with a stick (as a means of discipline) 1 Cor 4:21 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Mort. 23, 3 Ἑρμῆν καθικόμενον ἐν τῇ ῥάβδῳ; Gen 32:11; 1 Km 17:43; 1 Ch 11:23; Dssm., B 115f [BS 120]). ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας with the full blessing Ro 15:29. ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ Mt 16:28. ἐν αἵματι Hb 9:25 (cp. Mi 6:6). ἐν τῷ ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι 1J 5:6. ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ Ἠλίου equipped w. the spirit and power of Elijah Lk 1:17. φθάνειν ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ come with the preaching of the gospel 2 Cor 10:14. μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ not burdened w. old leaven 1 Cor 5:8.

ⓑ it can serve to express means or instrumentality in terms of location for a specific action (cp. TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 5f [Stone p. 30] κρατῶν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ζυγόν; Tat. 9, 2 οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεσσοῖς ἀθύροντες ‘those who play w. gaming pieces’ [as, e.g., in backgammon]): κατακαίειν ἐν πυρί Rv 17:16 (cp. Bar 1:2; 1 Esdr 1:52; 1 Macc 5:5 al.; as early as Il. 24, 38; cp. POxy 2747, 74; Aelian, HA 14, 15. Further, the ἐν Rv 17:16 is not textually certain). ἐν ἅλατι ἁλίζειν, ἀρτύειν Mt 5:13; Mk 9:50; Lk 14:34 (s. M-M p. 210; WHutton, ET 58, ’46/47, 166–68). ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκαίνειν Rv 7:14. ἐν αἵματι καθαρίζειν Hb 9:22. ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ ἀποκτείνειν kill with the sword Rv 6:8 (1 Esdr 1:50; 1 Macc 2:9; cp. 3:3; Jdth 16:4; ἀπολεῖ ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ En 99:16; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] ἐν ῥ. πεσῇ … πεσοῦνται ἐν μαχαίρῃ; cp. Lucian, Hist. Conscrib. 12 ἐν ἀκοντίῳ φονεύειν). ἐν μαχαίρῃ πατάσσειν Lk 22:49 (διχοτομήσατε … ἐν μ. GrBar 16:3); ἐν μ. ἀπόλλυσθαι perish by the sword Mt 26:52. ποιμαίνειν ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ Rv 2:27; 12:5; 19:15 (s. ποιμαίνω 2aγ and cp. PGM 36, 109). καταπατεῖν τι ἐν τοῖς ποσίν tread someth. w. the feet Mt 7:6 (cp. Sir 38:29). δύο λαοὺς βλέπω ἐν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς μου I see two peoples with my eyes GJs 17:2 (ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὀρᾶν=see with the eyes: cp. Il. 1, 587; Od. 8, 459; Callinus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 1, 20 Diehl²). ποιεῖν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι do a mighty deed w. one’s arm Lk 1:51 (cp. Sir 38:30); cp. 11:20. δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι be justified by the blood Ro 5:9. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2; ἐν τ. παρακλήσει 2 Cor 7:7. εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ Eph 1:3. λαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψάλμοις 5:19. ἀσπάσασθαι … ἐν εὐχῇ greet w. prayer GJs 24:1. Of intellectual process γινώσκειν ἔν τινι know or recognize by someth. (cp. Thuc. 7, 11, 1 ἐν ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε; Sir 4:24; 11:28; 26:29) J 13:35; 1J 3:19; cp. ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου in the breaking of bread Lk 24:35 (s. 10c).—The ἐν which takes the place of the gen. of price is also instrumental ἠγόρασας ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου Rv 5:9 (cp. 1 Ch 21:24 ἀγοράζω ἐν ἀργυρίῳ).—ἐν ᾧ whereby Ro 14:21.—The idiom ἀλλάσσειν, μεταλλάσσειν τι ἔν τινι exchange someth. for someth. else Ro 1:23, 25 (cp. Ps 105:20) is not un-Greek (Soph., Ant. 945 Danaë had to οὐράνιον φῶς ἀλλάξαι ἐν χαλκοδέτοις αὐλαῖς=change the heavenly light for brass-bound chambers).

⑥ marker of agency: with the help of (Diod S 19, 46, 4 ἐν τοῖς μετέχουσι τοῦ συνεδρίου=with the help of the members of the council; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 7, 9 p. 259, 31 ἐν ἐκείνῳ ἑαλωκότες) ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια Mt 9:34. ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις λαλεῖν 1 Cor 14:21. κρίνειν τ. οἰκουμένην ἐν ἀνδρί Ac 17:31 (cp. SIG² 850, 8 [173/172 B.C.] κριθέντω ἐν ἄνδροις τρίοις; Synes., Ep. 91 p. 231b ἐν ἀνδρί); perh. 1 Cor 6:2 (s. 1e); ἀπολύτρωσις ἐν Χρ. redemption through Christ Ro 3:24 (cp. ἐν αὐτῷ σωθήσεσθε Just., A I, 60, 3).

⑦ marker of circumstance or condition under which someth. takes place: ἐν ᾧ κρίνεις Ro 2:1 (but s. B-D-F §219, 2); ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 14:22; ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται 2 Cor 11:12; ἐν ᾧ τις τολμᾷ 11:21; ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν whereas they slander 1 Pt 2:12, cp. 3:16 (on these Petrine pass. s. also ὅς 1k); ἐν ᾧ ξενίζονται in view of your changed attitude they consider it odd 4:4. ἐν ᾧ in 3:19 may similarly refer to a changed circumstance, i.e. from death to life (WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits, ’65, esp. 135–42: ‘in this sphere, under this influence’ [of the spirit]). Other possibilities: as far as this is concerned: πνεῦμα• ἐν ᾧ spirit; as which (FZimmermann, APF 11, ’35, 174 ‘meanwhile’ [indessen]; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism, ’46, 108–15: ‘on that occasion’=when he died).—Before a substantive inf. (oft. LXX; s. KHuber, Unters. über den Sprachchar. des griech. Lev., diss. Zürich 1916, 83): in that w. pres. inf. (POxy 743, 35 [2 B.C.] ἐν τῷ δέ με περισπᾶσθαι οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν Ἀπολλωνίῳ; Just., D. 10, 3 ἐν τῷ μήτε σάββατα τηρεῖν μήτε …) βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν as they were having rough going in the waves=having a difficult time making headway Mk 6:48. ἐθαύμαζον ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν … αὐτόν they marveled over his delay Lk 1:21. ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἐκτείνειν σε in that you extend your hand Ac 4:30; cp. 3:26; Hb 8:13. W. aor. inf. ἐν τῷ ὑποτάξαι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα Hb 2:8. Somet. the circumstantial and temporal (s. 7 and 10) uses are so intermingled that it is difficult to decide between them; so in some of the pass. cited above, and also Hv 1, 1, 8 et al. (B-D-F §404, 3; Rob. 1073).—WHutton, Considerations for the Translation of ἐν, Bible Translator 9, ’58, 163–70; response by NTurner, ibid. 10, ’59, 113–20.—On ἐν w. article and inf. s. ISoisalon-Soininen, Die Infinitive in der LXX, ’65, 80ff.

⑧ marker denoting the object to which someth. happens or in which someth. shows itself, or by which someth. is recognized, to, by, in connection with: ζητεῖν τι ἔν τινι require someth. in the case of someone 1 Cor 4:2; cp. ἐν ἡμῖν μάθητε so that you might learn in connection w. us vs. 6. Cp. Phil 1:30. ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί that this may be done in my case 1 Cor 9:15 (Just., D. 77, 3 τοῦτο γενόμενον ἐν τῷ ἡμετέρῳ Χριστῷ). ἐδόξαζον ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸν θεόν perh. they glorified God in my case Gal 1:24, though because of me and for me are also possible. μήτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία GJs 13:1 (s. ἀνακεφαλαιόω 1). ποιεῖν τι ἔν τινι do someth. to (with) someone (Epict., Ench. 33, 12; Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 18 μὴ ἑτεροῖόν τι ποιήσῃς ἐν ἐμοί; Gen 40:14; Jdth 7:24; 1 Macc 7:23) Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31. ἐργάζεσθαί τι ἔν τινι Mk 14:6. ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι have someth. in someone J 3:15 (but ἐν αὐτῷ is oft. constr. w. πιστεύων, cp. v.l.); cp. 14:30 (s. BNoack, Satanas u. Soteria ’48, 92). ἵνα δικαιοσύνης ναὸν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ σώματι ἀναδείξῃ AcPlCor 2:17 (s. ἀναδείκνυμι 1).—For the ordinary dat. (Diod S 3, 51, 4 ἐν ἀψύχῳ ἀδύνατον=it is impossible for a lifeless thing; Ael. Aristid. 49, 15 K.=25 p. 492 D.: ἐν Νηρίτῳ θαυμαστὰ ἐνεδείξατο=[God] showed wonderful things to N.; 53 p. 629 D.: οὐ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς βελτίστοις εἰσὶ παῖδες, ἐν δὲ πονηροτάτοις οὐκέτι=it is not the case that the very good have children, and the very bad have none [datives of possession]; 54 p. 653 D.: ἐν τ. φαύλοις θετέον=to the bad; EpJer 66 ἐν ἔθνεσιν; Aesop, Fab. 19, 8 and 348a, 5 v.l. Ch.) ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί Gal 1:16. φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς Ro 1:19 (Aesop 15c, 11 Ch. τ. φανερὸν ἐν πᾶσιν=evident to all). ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος (corresp. to τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβ.) 1 Cor 14:11 (Amphis Com. [IV B.C.] 21 μάταιός ἐστιν ἐν ἐμοί). δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις Ac 4:12. θεῷ … ἐν ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:14.—Esp. w. verbs of striking against: προσκόπτω, πταίω, σκανδαλίζομαι; s. these entries.

⑨ marker of cause or reason, because of, on account of (PParis 28, 13=UPZ 48, 12f [162/161 B.C.] διαλυόμενοι ἐν τῷ λιμῷ; Ps 30:11; 1 Macc 16:3 ἐν τῷ ἐλέει; 2 Macc 7:29; Sir 33:17)

ⓐ gener. ἁγιάζεσθαι ἔν τινι Hb 10:10; 1 Cor 7:14. ἐν τ. ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν Ro 1:24; perh. ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα 9:7; Hb 11:18 (both Gen 21:12). ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ αὐτῶν because of their many words Mt 6:7. ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν this is the reason why we believe J 16:30; cp. Ac 24:16; 1 Cor 4:4 (Just., D. 68, 7 οὐχὶ καὶ ἐν τούτῳ δυσωπήσω ὑμᾶς μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς διδασκάλοις ὑμῶν=‘surely you will be convinced by this [argument] to lose confidence in your teachers, won’t you?’); perh. 2 Cor 5:2. Sim., of the occasion: ἔφυγεν ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ at this statement Ac 7:29; cp. 8:6. W. attraction ἐν ᾧ = ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that = because Ro 8:3; Hb 2:18; 6:17.

ⓑ w. verbs that express feeling or emotion, to denote that toward which the feeling is directed; so: εὐδοκεῖν (εὐδοκία), εὐφραίνεσθαι, καυχᾶσθαι, χαίρειν et al.

⑩ marker of a period of time, in, while, when

ⓐ indicating an occurrence or action within which, at a certain point, someth. occurs Mt 2:1. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 3:1. ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς afterward Lk 7:11. ἐν τῷ μεταξύ meanwhile (PTebt 72, 190; PFlor 36, 5) J 4:31. in the course of, within ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (X., Ages. 1, 34; Diod S 13, 14, 2; 20, 83, 4; Arrian, Anab. 4, 6, 4 ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις; Aelian, VH 1, 6; IPriene 9, 29; GDI 1222, 4 [Arcadia] ἰν ἁμέραις τρισί; EpArist 24; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1:3 Jac.) Mt 27:40; J 2:19f.

ⓑ point of time when someth. occurs ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως Mt 11:22 (En 10:6; Just., D. 38, 2; Tat. 12, 4). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ J 6:44; 11:24; 12:48; cp. 7:37. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; cp. 7:22; J 4:53. ἐν σαββάτῳ 12:2; J 7:23. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ J 11:9 (opp. ἐν τῇ νυκτί vs. 10). ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ on the second visit Ac 7:13. ἐν τῇ παλιγγενεσίᾳ in the new age Mt 19:28. ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ 1 Cor 15:23; 1 Th 2:19; 3:13; Phil 2:12 (here, in contrast to the other pass., there is no reference to the second coming of Christ.—Just., D. 31, 1 ἐν τῇ ἐνδόξῳ γινομένῃ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ; 35, 8; 54, 1 al.); 1J 2:28. ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει in the resurrection Mt 22:28; Mk 12:23; Lk 14:14; 20:33; J 11:24 (Just., D. 45, 2 ἐν τῇ τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναστάσει). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι at the last trumpet-call 1 Cor 15:52. ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει at the appearance of Jesus/Christ (in the last days) 2 Th 1:7; 1 Pt 1:7, 13; 4:13.

ⓒ to introduce an activity whose time is given when, while, during (Diod S 23, 12, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις=in the case of this kind of behavior) ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ when (you) pray Mt 21:22. ἐν τῇ στάσει during the revolt Mk 15:7. ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ in the course of his teaching Mk 4:2; 12:38. If Lk 24:35 belongs here, the sense would be on the occasion of, when (but s. 5b). ἐν αὐτῷ in it (the preaching of the gospel) Eph 6:20. γρηγοροῦντες ἐν αὐτῇ (τῇ προσευχῇ) while you are watchful in it Col 4:2. Esp. w. the pres. inf. used substantively: ἐν τῷ σπείρειν while (he) sowed Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; cp. 6:48 (s. 7 above and βασανίζω); ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους while people were asleep Mt 13:25; ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτόν during the accusations against him 27:12. W. the aor. inf. the meaning is likewise when. Owing to the fundamental significance of the aor. the action is the focal point (s. Rob. 1073, opp. B-D-F §404) ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φωνήν Lk 9:36. ἐν τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν αὐτόν 19:15. ἐν τῷ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτούς 9:34.—W. ἐν ᾦ while, as long as (Soph., Trach. 929; Cleanthes [IV/III B.C.] Stoic. I p. 135, 1 [Diog. L. 7, 171]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 11 Jac.; Plut., Mor. 356c; Arrian, Anab. 6, 12, 1; Pamprepios of Panopolis [V A.D.] 1, 22 [ed. HGerstinger, SBWienAk 208/3, 1928]) Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 24:44 D; J 5:7.

⑪ marker denoting kind and manner, esp. functioning as an auxiliary in periphrasis for adverbs (Kühner-G. I 466): ἐν δυνάμει w. power, powerfully Mk 9:1; Ro 1:4; Col 1:29; 2 Th 1:11; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ justly Ac 17:31; Rv 19:11 (cp. Just., A II, 4, 3 and D. 16, 3; 19, 2 ἐν δίκῃ). ἐν χαρᾷ joyfully Ro 15:32. ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ earnestly Ac 26:7. ἐν σπουδῇ zealously Ro 12:8. ἐν χάριτι graciously Gal 1:6; 2 Th 2:16. ἐν (πάσῃ) παρρησίᾳ freely, openly J 7:4; 16:29; Phil 1:20. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ Ac 5:23. ἐν τάχει (PHib 47, 35 [256 B.C.] ἀπόστειλον ἐν τάχει) Lk 18:8; Ro 16:20; Rv 1:1; 22:6. ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7 (belongs prob. not to σοφία, but to λαλοῦμεν: in the form of a secret; cp. Polyb. 23, 3, 4; 26, 7, 5; Just., D. 63, 2 Μωυσῆς … ἐν παραβολῇ λέγων; 68, 6 εἰρήμενον … ἐν μυστηρίῳ; Diod S 17, 8, 5 ἐν δωρεαῖς λαβόντες=as gifts; 2 Macc 4:30 ἐν δωρεᾷ=as a gift; Sir 26:3; Polyb. 28, 17, 9 λαμβάνειν τι ἐν φερνῇ). Of the norm: ἐν μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους acc. to the measure of each individual part Eph 4:16. On 1 Cor 1:21 s. AWedderburn, ZNW 64, ’73, 132–34.

⑫ marker of specification or substance: w. adj. πλούσιος ἐν ἐλέει Eph 2:4; cp. Tit 2:3; Js 1:8.—of substance consisting in (BGU 72, 11 [191 A.D.] ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε) τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν Eph 2:15. ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι Js 1:4 (contrast Just., A I, 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι). Hb 13:21a.— amounting to (BGU 970, 14=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 242, 14f [177 A.D.] προσηνενκάμην αὐτῷ προοῖκα ἐν δραχμαῖς ἐννακοσίαις) πᾶσαν τὴν συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε Ac 7:14.—Very rarely for the genitive (Philo Mech. 75, 29 τὸ ἐν τῷ κυλίνδρῳ κοίλασμα; EpArist 31 ἡ ἐν αὐτοῖς θεωρία = ἡ αὐτῶν θ.; cp. 29; Tat. 18, 1 πᾶν τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ εἶδος) ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι the free gift in beneficence or grace Ro 5:15.—DELG. LfgrE s.v. ἐν col. 569 (lit. esp. early Greek). M-M. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐν

9 SKJÖLDR

(gen. skjaldar, dat. skildi; pl. skildir, acc. skjöldu), m. shield;

hafa e-n at skildi fyrir sér, to have another as a shield before one;

bera efra (hærra) skjöld, to have the best of it, to gain the day;

þjóna undir þann skjöld, to serve under that standard;

leika tveim skjöldum, to play a double game;

koma í opna skjöldu, to attack in flank (from the left);

skjóta skildi yfir e-n, to protect one.

* * *

m., gen. skjaldar, dat. skildi; an old dat. in poets skjaldi,—hj aldrs á mínum skj aldi, Eb. 27 new Ed. (in a verse); h aldorð í bug skj aldi, Fms. vi. (in a verse); h aldir fast ok skj aldi, Kormak: plur. skildir; acc. skjöldu, mod. skildi: [Ulf. skildus = θυρεός, Ephes. vi. 16; Dan. skjold; Swed. sköld; common to all Teut. languages: it is commonly derived from skjól, shelter, although the short root vowel and the final d of skild speak against this: ‘skillingr’ or ‘skildingr’ ( a shilling) may be a derivative from ‘skildus,’ from the shape, and from the painted or scratched ‘ring’ on the shields; see below: in fact, an old poet (Bragi) calls the shield ‘the penny of the hall of Odin.’]

A. A shield, the generic name; the special names are, rönd, rít, baugr, targa, lind; þeir höfðu ekki langa skjöldu, Fas. i. 379; góðan skjöld ok þjökkan á hálsi, Sks. 407; skjöld á hlið, Bjarn. 62, and so in countless instances.

II. special phrases; halda skildi fyrir e-m (e-n), to hold one’s shield, as a second in a holmganga, Glúm. 332, Korm. 88; or, fyrir e-n, Ísl. ii. 257; era héra at borgnara þótt hæna beri skjöld, Fms. vii. 116: hafa e-n at skildi, to have another as one’s shield, i. e. seek shelter behind him, Nj. 8; bera efra skjöld, to carry the highest shield, gain the day, Fas. i. 383, Fms. x. 394: þjóna undir þann skjöld, to serve under that shield, that standard, vii. 293; þjóna undir sama skjöld, viii. 109: binda öllum jafnan skjöld, to tie the same shield to all, treat all in one fashion (metaphor from a withy-shield?), Clem. 44: leika tveim skjöldum, to play with two shields, play a double game (metaphor from the red and white shields, see B), Am. 70, Hkr. i. (in a verse): koma í opna skjöldu, to fall into the open (hollow) shield, to attack in flank ( from the left), Fms. vi. 408, Stj. 365, Eg. 295, Fb. ii. 123; rennir sá maðr í kirkjugarð, ok sækir þingat skjöld, and seeks protection there, N. G. L. i. 352; múrr ok skjöldr, Mar.

III. of any shield-formed thing; tólgar-s., a round piece of tallow; also of shield-like spots on cattle or whales: of a white tablet in churches, Vm. 142, 162, 168, Ám. 55, Pm. 17: brjóst-skjöldr, a round brooch.

IV. a pr. name, Nj., Hkr. (of the son of Odin, the ancestor of the Danish kings); Skjöldungar, Edda; Skjöldr Skánunga goð, Fb. iii. 246.

COMPDS: skjaldarband, skjaldarbukl, skjaldarfetill, skjaldarjötunn, skjaldarrönd, skjaldarskirfl, skjaldarsporðr.

B. Remarks on the shield.—A shield was raised as a signal in time of war; a red shield betokened war (rauðr skjöldr, her-skjöldr), a white shield peace (hvítr skjöldr, friðar-skjöldr, a peace-shield); in a battle the red shield was hoisted, Hkv. 1. 33; but, bregða upp friðar skildi, to hoist the (white) shield of peace, was a sign that the battle was to cease; hann lét skjóta upp skildi hvítum, Fagrsk. 6l, Fms. vii. 23; hence also the phrase, bera herskjöld, or, fara herskildi, to harry, overrun a land with the ‘war shield,’ see frið-skjöldr and her-skjöldr (s. v. herr). War ships were lined from stem to stern with a wall of shields,—skip skarat skjöldum, or skjaldat skip; hann kom í Bjarnar-fjörð með al-skjölduðu skipi, síðan var hann Skjaldar-Björn kallaðr, Landn. 156. The halls of the ancients were hung all round with a row of shields, Gm. 9, Edda 2, Eg. 43, see the curious story in Fas. iii. 42. For the shield-wall in battles see skjald-borg. Ancient sayings; nú er skarð fyrir skildi, now there is a gap for a shield, a breach in the fence, of a heavy loss, such as the death of a person, nú er skarð fyrir skildi, nú er svanrinn nár á Tjörn, Jón Þorl.; höggva skarð í skildi e-s, to cut a notch in one’s shield, inflict a severe blow, Orkn. (in a verse). Shields were furnished with a painted or carved ‘ring’ representing mythological or heroic subjects; these rings are the earliest works of Northern art on record, hence come the names rít, baugr, rönd, of which rít points to scratching (whereas Bragi used ‘fá’ = to paint); rauðum skildi, rönd var ór gulli, Hkv. 1. 33. Such shields were a lordly gift, and gave rise to several ancient poems treating of the subjects carved or painted on the shield, such as the famous Haust-löng by Thjodolf, the Ragnars-kviða by Bragi, the two Beru-drápur (Shield-songs) by Egill; these ‘shield-lays’ were afterwards the sources of the writer of the Edda, but only a few fragments are preserved; (cp. the Greek lay on ‘the shield of Heracles,’ and the lay on Achilles’ shield in the Iliad.)

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > SKJÖLDR

10 facio

făcĭo, feci, factum, 3, v. a. and n.; in pass.: fio, factus, fieri ( imper. usually fac, but the arch form face is freq., esp. in Plaut. and Ter., as Plaut. As. prol. 4; 1, 1, 77; id. Aul. 2, 1, 30; id. Cist. 2, 1, 28; id. Ep. 1, 1, 37; 2, 2, 117; id. Most. 3, 2, 167 et saep.; Ter. And. 4, 1, 57; 4, 2, 29; 5, 1, 2; 14; id. Eun. 1, 2, 10 al.; Cato, R. R. 23, 1; 26; 32 al.; Cat. 63, 78; 79; 82; Ov. Med. fac. 60; Val. Fl. 7, 179 al.; futur. facie for faciam, Cato ap. Quint. 1, 7, 23; cf. dico, init., and the letter e:
faxo,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 199; 2, 1, 42; 3, 3, 17; 3, 4, 14; 5, 1, 55 et saep.; Ter. And. 5, 2, 13; id. Eun. 2, 2, 54; 4, 3, 21 al.; Verg. A. 9, 154; 12, 316; Ov. M. 3, 271; 12, 594: faxim, Enn. ap. Non. 507, 23; Plaut. Am. 1, 3, 13; id. Aul. 3, 2, 6; 3, 5, 20 al.; Ter. And. 4, 4, 14; id. Heaut. 1, 2, 13:
faxis,
Hor. S. 2, 3, 38; Sil. 15, 362: faxit, Lex Numae in Paul. ex Fest. s. v. ALIVTA, p. 6 Mull.; Fragm. XII. Tab. ap. Gell. 20, 1, 12; Plaut. Capt. 3, 4, 90; 3, 5, 54; id. Cas. 3, 5, 6 al.; Ter. Heaut. 1, 2, 24; id. Phorm. 3, 3, 21:
faximus,
Plaut. Truc. 1, 1, 40: faxitis, an old form in Liv. 23, 11, 2; 25, 12, 10; 29, 27, 3:
faxint,
Plaut. Am. 2, 1, 85; id. Aul. 2, 1, 27; 2, 2, 79 al.; Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 109; id. Hec. 1, 2, 27; 3, 2, 19; Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 35, § 81; id. Fam. 14, 3, 3.—In pass. imper.:
fi,
Plaut. Curc. 1, 1, 87; Hor. S. 2, 5, 38; Pers. 1, 1, 39:
fite,
Plaut. Curc. 1, 1, 89 al. — Indic.: facitur, Nigid. ap. Non. 507, 15: fitur, Cato ap. Prisc. p. 789:
fiebantur,
id. ib.: fitum est, Liv. Andron. ap. Non. 475, 16.— Subj.: faciatur, Titin. ib.— Inf.: fiere, Enn. ap. Charis. p. 75 P.; Ann. v. 15, ed. Vahl.; Laev. ap. Gell. 19, 7, 10.—On the long i of fit, v. Ritschl, prol. p. 184, and cf. Plaut. Capt. prol. 25: ut fit in bello) [prob. root bha-; Sanscr. bhasas, light; Gr. pha-, in phainô, phêmi; cf. fax, facetiae, facilis, Corss. Ausspr. 1, 423.—But Curt. refers facio to root the- (strengthened THEK), Griech. Etym. p. 64], to make in all senses, to do, perform, accomplish, prepare, produce, bring to pass, cause, effect, create, commit, perpetrate, form, fashion, etc. (cf. in gen.:
ago, factito, reddo, operor, tracto): verbum facere omnem omnino faciendi causam complectitur, donandi, solvendi, judicandi, ambulandi, numerandi,
Dig. 50, 16, 218.
I.
Act.
A.
In gen.
(α).
With acc.: ut faber, cum quid aedificaturus est, non ipse facit materiam, sed ea utitur, quae sit parata, etc.... Quod si non est a deo materia facta, ne terra quidem et aqua et aer et ignis a deo factus est, Cic. N. D. Fragm. ap. Lact. 2, 8 (Cic. ed. Bait. 7, p. 121):
sphaera ab Archimede facta,
Cic. Rep. 1, 14:
fecitque idem et sepsit de manubiis comitium et curiam,
id. ib. 2, 17:
aedem,
id. ib. 2, 20:
pontem in Arari faciundum curat,
Caes. B. G. 1, 13, 1:
castra,
id. ib. 1, 48, 2; Cic. Fam. 15, 4, 4:
faber vasculum fecit,
Quint. 7, 10, 9:
classem,
Caes. B. G. 4, 21, 4:
cenas et facere et obire,
Cic. Att. 9, 13, 6:
ignem lignis viridibus,
id. Verr. 2, 1, 17, § 45:
poema,
to compose, id. Pis. 29, 70:
carmina,
Juv. 7, 28:
versus,
id. 7, 38:
sermonem,
Cic. Fam. 9, 8, 1; cf.
litteram,
id. Ac. 2, 2, 6: ludos, to celebrate, exhibit = edere, id. Rep. 2, 20; id. Att. 15, 10;
also i. q. ludificari,
Plaut. Capt. 3, 4, 47:
sementes,
i. e. to sow, Caes. B. G. 1, 3, 1:
messem,
Col. 2, 10, 28:
pecuniam,
to make, acquire, Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 6, § 17:
manum (with parare copias),
to collect, prepare, id. Caecin. 12, 33; so,
cohortes,
Caes. B. C. 3, 87, 4:
exercitum,
Vell. 2, 109, 2; and:
auxilia mercede,
Tac. A. 6, 33:
iter,
Cic. Att. 3, 1; id. Planc. 26, 65; id. Div. 1, 33, 73 et saep.; cf.
also the phrases: aditum sibi ad aures,
Quint. 4, 1, 46:
admirationem alicujus rei alicui,
to excite, Liv. 25, 11, 18; Sen. Ep. 115:
aes alienum,
Cic. Att. 13, 46, 4; Liv. 2, 23, 5; Sen. Ep. 119, 1:
alienationem disjunctionemque,
Cic. Lael. 21, 76:
animum alicui,
Liv. 25, 11, 10:
arbitrium de aliquo,
to decide, Hor. C. 4, 7, 21;
opp. arbitrium alicui in aliqua re,
i. e. to leave the decision to one, Liv. 43, 15, 5:
audaciam hosti,
id. 29, 34, 10:
audientiam orationi,
Cic. Div. in Caecil. 13, 42:
auspicium alicui,
Liv. 1, 34, 9; Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 86:
auctoritatem,
Cic. de Imp. Pomp. 15, 43:
bellum,
Cic. Off. 1, 11, 35; Caes. B. G. 3, 29, 2:
multa bona alicui,
Plaut. Poen. 5, 4, 46:
castra,
to pitch, Tac. H. 5, 1:
caulem,
to form, Col. Arb. 54:
clamores,
to make, raise, Cic. Brut. 95, 326:
cognomen alicui,
to give, Liv. 1, 3, 9:
commercium sermonis,
id. 5, 15, 5:
concitationes,
Caes. B. C. 3, 106 fin.:
conjurationes,
to form, id. B. G. 4, 30 fin.:
consuetudinem alicui cum altero,
Cic. Fam. 13, 23, 1:
consilia alicui,
Liv. 35, 42, 8:
contentionem cum aliquo,
Cic. Off. 1, 38, 137:
controversiam,
to occasion, id. Or. 34, 121:
convicium magnum alicui,
id. Fam. 10, 16, 1:
copiam pugnandi militibus,
Liv. 7, 13, 10:
corpus,
to grow fat, corpulent, Cels. 7, 3 fin.; Phaedr. 3, 7, 5:
curam,
Tac. A. 3, 52:
damnum,
to suffer, Cic. Brut. 33, 125:
detrimentum,
id. Verr. 2, 4, 9, § 20:
desiderium alicujus, rei alicui,
Liv. 3, 34, 7; 7, 24, 10:
dicta,
Ov. F. 2, 375; 3, 515:
difficultatem,
Quint. 10, 3, 10 and 16:
discordiam,
to cause, Tac. H. 3, 48:
discrimen,
Quint. 7, 2, 14; 11, 1, 43:
disjunctionem (with alienationem),
Cic. Lael. 21, 76:
dolorem alicui,
id. Att. 11, 8, 2:
dulcedinem,
Sen. Ep. 111:
eloquentiam alicui (ira),
Quint. 6, 2, 26:
epigramma,
to write, Cic. Arch. 10, 25:
errorem,
Sen. Ep. 67:
eruptiones ex oppido,
Caes. B. C. 2, 2, 5:
exemplum,
Quint. 5, 2, 2: exempla = edere or statuere, Plaut. Most. 5, 1, 66. exercitum, to raise, muster, Tac. A. 6, 33:
exspectationem,
Quint. 9, 2, 23:
facinus,
Plaut. Bacch. 4, 9, 1; Cic. Fin. 2, 29, 95; Tac. A. 12, 31:
facultatem recte judicandi alicui,
Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 73, § 179:
fallaciam,
Ter. And. 1, 8, 7:
famam ingenii,
Quint. 11, 2, 46:
fastidium,
Liv. 3, 1, 7:
favorem alicui,
id. 42, 14, 10; Quint. 4, 1, 33:
fidem alicui,
Cic. Cat. 3, 2, 4; id. Att. 7, 8, 1; Quint. 6, 2, 18:
finem,
Cic. Att. 16, 16, 16; id. Rep. 2, 44:
formidinem,
to excite, Tac. H. 3, 10:
fortunam magnam (with parare),
Liv. 24, 22, 9:
fraudem,
Plaut. Mil. 2, 2, 9; Cic. Att. 4, 12:
fugam fecerunt, stronger than fugerunt,
Liv. 8, 9, 12 Weissenb.; Sall. J. 53, 3;
but: cum fugam in regia fecisset (sc. ceterorum),
Liv. 1, 56, 4; so,
fugam facere = fugare,
id. 21, 5, 16; 21, 52, 10:
fugam hostium facere,
id. 22, 24, 8; 26, 4, 8 al.:
gestum vultu,
Quint. 11, 3, 71:
gradum,
Cic. de Or. 2, 61, 249; id. Verr. 2, 2, 1, § 3; Quint. 3, 6, 8:
gratiam alicujus rei,
Liv. 3, 56, 4; 8, 34, 3:
gratulationem alicui,
Cic. Fam. 11, 18, 3; Sen. Ep. 6:
gratum alicui,
Ter. Eun. 4, 4, 56; Cic. Rep. 1, 21; cf.:
gratissimum alicui,
id. Fam. 7, 21 fin.:
histrioniam,
Plaut. Am. prol. 152:
homicidium,
to commit, Quint. 5, 9, 9:
hospitium cum aliquo,
Cic. Balb. 18, 42:
imperata,
Caes. B. G. 2, 3, 3:
impetum in hostem,
Cic. Fin. 1, 10, 34; Liv. 25, 11, 2:
incursionem,
Liv. 3, 38, 3:
indicium,
Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 57, § 150:
inducias,
id. Phil. 8, 7, 20:
initium,
to begin, id. Agr. 2, 29, 79; cf.:
initia ab aliquo,
id. Rep. 1, 19:
injuriam,
id. ib. 3, 14 (opp. accipere); Caes. B. G. 1, 36, 4; Quint. 3, 6, 49; 10, 1, 115:
insidias alicui,
Cic. Mil. 9, 23:
iram,
Quint. 6, 1, 14:
jacturam,
Cic. Off. 3, 23, 89; id. Fin. 2, 24, 79; Caes. B. G. 7, 77, 7:
judicium,
Cic. Att. 7, 23, 2:
judicatum,
to execute, id. Fl. 20, 48:
jus alicui,
Liv. 32, 13, 6:
jussa,
Ov. F. 1, 379:
laetitiam,
Cic. Fin. 1, 7, 25:
largitiones,
id. Tusc. 3, 20, 48:
locum poetarum mendacio,
Curt. 3, 1, 4:
locum alicui rei,
Cels. 2, 14 fin.; 7, 4, 3; Curt. 4, 11, 8; Sen. Ep. 91, 13 et saep.:
longius,
Cic. Leg. 1, 7, 22 al.:
valde magnum,
id. Q. Fr. 1, 2, 2, § 7:
medicinam alicui,
to administer, id. Fam. 14, 7:
memoriam,
Quint. 11, 2, 4:
mentionem,
Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 11, 2:
metum,
to excite, Tac. A. 6, 36:
turbida lux metum insidiarum faciebat,
suggested, Liv. 10, 33, 5:
metum alicui,
id. 9, 41, 11:
missum aliquem,
Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 58, § 134:
modum irae,
Liv. 4, 50, 4:
moram,
Cic. Att. 16, 2, 1; Plaut. Most. 1, 1, 72:
morem alicujus rei sibi,
Liv. 35, 35, 13:
motus,
id. 28, 46, 8: multam alicui, Cato ap. Gell. 11, 1, 6:
munditias,
id. R. R. 2, 4:
mutationem,
Cic. Sest. 12, 27; id. Off. 1, 33, 120:
multa alicui,
id. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 5, § 16:
naufragium,
to suffer, id. Fam. 16, 9, 1:
negotium alicui,
to give to do, make trouble for, Quint. 5, 12, 13; Just. 21, 4, 4:
nomen alicui,
Liv. 8, 15, 8; cf.
nomina,
to incur debts, Cic. Off. 3, 14, 59:
odium vitae,
Plin. 20, 18, 76, § 199:
officium suum,
Ter. Phorm. 4, 5, 12:
omnia amici causa,
Cic. Lael. 10, 35; id. Fam. 5, 11, 2:
opinionem alicui,
id. Div. in Caecil. 14, 45:
orationem,
id. de Or. 1, 14, 63; id. Brut. 8, 30; id. Or. 51, 172:
otia alicui,
to grant, Verg. E. 1, 6:
pacem,
to conclude, Cic. Off. 3, 30, 109:
pecuniam ex aliqua re,
id. Verr. 2, 2, 6, § 17:
periculum,
Ter. Eun. 3, 2, 23; id. Heaut. 2, 1, 9; Tac. A. 13, 33; 16, 19; Sall. C. 33, 1: perniciem alicui, to cause, = parare, Tac. H. 2, 70:
planum,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 19, 54:
potestatem,
id. Cat. 3, 5, 11; id. Rep. 2, 28:
praedam,
Caes. B. G. 4, 34, 5; Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 60, § 156; Plaut. Poen. 3, 6, 8:
praedas ab aliquo,
Nep. Chabr. 2, 2:
proelium,
to join, Caes. B. G. 1, 13; Cic. Deiot. 5, 13; Liv. 25, 1, 5; Tac. H. 4, 79; id. A. 12, 40:
promissum,
Cic. Off. 3, 25, 95:
pudorem,
Liv. 3, 31, 3:
ratum,
id. 28, 39, 16:
rem,
Ter. Ad. 2, 2, 12:
reum,
to accuse, Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 38: risum, Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 9, 1; Quint. 6, 1, 40; 48:
scelus,
to commit, Tac. H. 1, 40:
securitatem alicui,
Liv. 36, 41, 1:
sermonem,
Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 26, § 66:
significationem ignibus,
Caes. B. G. 2, 33, 3:
silentium,
Liv. 24, 7, 12:
somnum,
to induce, Juv. 3, 282:
spem,
Cic. Att. 3, 16; Liv. 30, 3, 7:
spiritus,
id. 30, 11, 3:
stercus,
Col. 2, 15:
stipendia,
Sall. J. 63, 3; Liv. 3, 27, 1; 5, 7, 5:
stomachum alicui,
Cic. Att. 5, 11, 2; id. Fam. 1, 9, 10:
suavium alicui,
Plaut. As. 4, 1, 53:
suspicionem,
Cic. Fl. 33, 83:
taedium alicujus rei,
Liv. 4, 57, 11:
terrorem iis,
to inflict, id. 10, 25, 8:
timorem,
to excite, id. 6, 28, 8:
mihi timorem,
Cic. Fam. 10, 18, 2:
totum,
Dig. 28, 5, 35:
transitum alicui,
Liv. 26, 25, 3:
turbam,
Ter. Eun. 4, 1, 2:
urinam,
Col. 6, 19:
usum,
Quint. 10, 3, 28:
vadimonium,
Cic. Quint. 18, 57:
verbum, verba,
to speak, talk, id. Verr. 2, 4, 65, § 147:
verbum,
to invent, id. Fin. 3, 15, 51:
versus,
id. Q. Fr. 3, 5:
vestigium,
id. Rab. Post. 17, 47: viam [p. 717] sibi, Liv. 3, 5, 6:
vim alicui or in aliquem,
id. 38, 24, 4; 3, 5, 5:
vires,
to get, acquire, Quint. 10, 3, 3:
vitium,
Cic. Top. 3, 15 al. —
(β).
With ut, ne, quin, or the simple subj.:
faciam, ut ejus diei locique meique semper meminerit,
Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 20:
facere ut remigret domum,
id. Pers. 4, 6, 3; id. Capt. 3, 4, 78; 4, 2, 77:
ea, quantum potui, feci, ut essent nota nostris,
Cic. Ac. 1, 2, 8:
facito, ut sciam,
id. Att. 2, 4, 4:
non potuisti ullo modo facere, ut mihi illam epistolam non mitteres,
id. ib. 11, 21, 1:
si facis ut patriae sit idoneus,
Juv. 14, 71:
ut nihil ad te dem litterarum facere non possum,
Cic. Ac. 8, 14, 1; for which, with quin:
facere non possum, quin ad te mittam,
I cannot forbear sending, id. ib. 12, 27, 2:
fecisti, ut ne cui maeror tuus calamitatem afferret,
id. Clu. 60, 168:
fac, ne quid aliud cures,
id. Fam. 16, 11, 1:
domi assitis, facite,
Ter. Eun. 3, 2, 53:
fac fidele sis fidelis,
Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 79:
fac cupidus mei videndi sis,
Cic. Fam. 5, 21, 5:
fac cogites,
id. ib. 11, 3, 4.—In pass.:
fieri potest, ut recte quis sentiat, etc.,
Cic. Tusc. 1, 3, 6: potest fieri, ut iratus dixerit, etc., Crass. ap. Cic. de Or. 2, 70, 285:
nec fieri possit, ut non statim alienatio facienda sit,
id. Lael. 21, 76; so with ut non, id. Verr. 2, 2, 77, § 190 (Zumpt, Gram. § 539).—
(γ).
With inf. = efficere, curare, to cause (rare):
nulla res magis talis oratores videri facit,
Cic. Brut. 38, 142; Pall. 6, 12:
aspectus arborum macrescere facit volucres inclusas,
Varr. R. R. 3, 5, 3; Sall. Fragm. ap. Sen. Ep. 114:
qui nati coram me cernere letum Fecisti,
Verg. A. 2, 539; Ov. H. 17, 174:
mel ter infervere facito,
Col. 12, 38, 5 (perh. also in Ov. H. 6, 100, instead of favet, v. Loers. ad h. l.; cf. infra, B. 4.).—
(δ).
Absol.:
ego plus, quam feci, facere non possum,
Cic. Fam. 11, 14, 3:
faciam, ut potero, Laeli,
id. de Sen. 3, 7; cf. id. Rep. 1, 24:
noli putare, pigritia me facere, quod non mea manu scribam,
id. Att. 16, 15, 1; so,
facere = hoc or id facere,
Lucr. 4, 1112 (cf. Munro ad loc.); 1153: vereor ne a te rursus dissentiam. M. Non facies, Quinte, Cic. Leg. 3, 15, 33;
so after scribam,
id. Att. 16, 16, 15:
nominaverunt,
id. Rep. 2, 28, 50;
after disserere: tu mihi videris utrumque facturus,
id. ib. 2, 11, 22;
after fingere: ut facit apud Platonem Socrates,
id. ib.:
necesse erit uti epilogis, ut in Verrem Cicero fecit,
Quint. 6, 1, 54:
qui dicere ac facere doceat,
id. 2, 3, 11:
faciant equites,
Juv. 7, 14; Liv. 42, 37, 6:
petis ut libellos meos recognoscendos curem. Faciam,
Plin. Ep. 4, 26, 1; 5, 1, 4 et saep. (cf. the use of facio, as neutr., to resume or recall the meaning of another verb, v. II. E. infra; between that use and this no line can be drawn).
B.
In partic.
1.
With a double object, to make a thing into something, to render it something:
senatum bene firmum firmiorem vestra auctoritate fecistis,
Cic. Phil. 6, 7, 18:
te disertum,
id. ib. 2, 39 fin.:
iratum adversario judicem,
id. de Or. 1, 51, 220:
heredem filiam,
to appoint, constitute, id. Verr. 2, 1, 43, § 111:
aliquem regem,
Just. 9, 6:
aliquem ludos,
Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 75:
aliquem absentem rei capitalis reum,
Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 38, § 93:
animum dubium,
id. de Imp. Pomp. 10, 27:
injurias irritas,
id. Verr. 2, 2, 26, § 63:
vectigalia sibi deteriora,
Caes. B. G. 1, 36, 4:
hi consules facti sunt,
Cic. de Sen. 5, 14:
disciplina doctior facta civitas,
id. Rep. 2, 19:
di ex hominibus facti,
id. ib. 2, 10; cf.:
tua virtute nobis Romanos ex amicis amicissimos fecisti,
Sall. J. 10, 2.—In pass.:
quo tibi sumere depositum clavum fierique tribuno?
to become a tribune, Hor. S. 1, 6, 25.—
2.
to value, esteem, regard a person or thing in any manner (like the Engl. make, in the phrase to make much of).—Esp. with gen. pretii:
in quo perspicere posses, quanti te, quanti Pompeium, quem unum ex omnibus facio, ut debeo, plurimi, quanti Brutum facerem,
Cic. Fam. 3, 10, 2:
te quotidie pluris feci,
id. ib. 3, 4, 2:
voluptatem virtus minimi facit,
id. Fin. 2, 13, 42:
dolorem nihili facere,
to care nothing for, to despise, id. ib. 27, 88:
nihili facio scire,
Plaut. Pers. 2, 2, 42:
negat se magni facere, utrum, etc.,
Quint. 11, 1, 38:
parum id facio,
Sall. J. 85, 31: si illi aliter nos faciant quam aequum sit. Plaut. Stich. 1, 1, 43.—
3.
With gen., to make a thing the property of a person, subject it to him: omnia, quae mulieris fuerunt, viri fiunt, Cic. Top. 4, 23.—Esp.: facere aliquid dicionis alicujus, to reduce to subjection under a person or power:
omnem oram Romanae dicionis fecit,
Liv. 21, 60, 3:
dicionis alienae facti,
id. 1, 25, 13; 5, 27, 14; cf.: ut munus imperii beneficii sui faceret, to make it ( seem) his own bounty, Just. 13, 4, 9:
ne delecto imperatore alio sui muneris rempublicam faceret,
Tac. A. 15, 52.—
4.
To represent a thing in any manner, to feign, assert, say. —Constr. with acc. and adj. or part., or with acc. and inf.
(α).
Acc. and part.:
in eo libro, ubi se exeuntem e senatu et cum Pansa colloquentem facit,
id. Brut. 60, 218:
Xenophon facit... Socratem disputantem,
id. N. D. 1, 12, 31; cf.:
ejus (Socratis) oratio, qua facit eum Plato usum apud judices,
id. Tusc. 1, 40 fin. al.—
(β).
Acc. and inf.:
qui nuper fecit servo currenti in via decesse populum,
Ter. Heaut. prol. 31:
fecerat et fetam procubuisse lupam,
Verg. A. 8, 630; cf. Ov. M. 6, 109, v. Bach ad h. l.:
poetae impendere apud inferos saxum Tantalo faciunt,
Cic. Tusc. 4, 16, 35:
quem (Herculem) Homerus apud inferos conveniri facit ab Ulixe,
id. N. D. 3, 16, 41:
Plato construi a deo mundum facit,
id. ib. 1, 8, 19:
Plato Isocratem laudari fecit a Socrate,
id. Opt. Gen. 6, 17; id. Brut. 38, 142:
M. Cicero dicere facit C. Laelium,
Gell. 17, 5, 1:
caput esse faciunt ea, quae perspicua dicunt,
Cic. Fia. 4, 4, 8, v. Madv. ad h. l.—
(γ).
In double construction:
Polyphemum Homerus cum ariete colloquentem facit ejusque laudare fortunas,
Cic. Tusc. 5, 39 fin. —
5.
To make believe, to pretend:
facio me alias res agere,
Cic. Fam. 15, 18:
cum verbis se locupletem faceret,
id. Fl. 20:
me unum ex iis feci, qui, etc.,
id. Planc. 27, 65.—
6.
Hypothetically in the imper. fac, suppose, assume:
fac, quaeso, qui ego sum, esse te,
Cic. Fam. 7, 23, 1; cf.:
fac potuisse,
id. Phil. 2, 3, 5:
fac animos non remanere post mortem,
id. Tusc. 1, 34, 82; 1, 29, 70:
fac velit,
Stat. Ach. 2, 241:
fac velle,
Verg. A. 4, 540.—
7.
In mercant. lang., to practise, exercise, follow any trade or profession:
cum mercaturas facerent,
Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 28, § 72:
naviculariam,
id. ib. 2, 5, 18, §
46: argentariam,
id. ib. 2, 5, 49, § 155; id. Caecin. 4, 10:
topiariam,
id. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 2, § 5:
haruspicinam,
id. Fam. 6, 18, 1:
praeconium,
id. ib.; so,
piraticam,
id. Post. Red. in Sen. 5, 11:
medicinam,
Phaedr. 1, 14, 2.—
8.
In relig. lang., like the Gr. rhezein, to perform or celebrate a religious rite; to offer sacrifice, make an offering, to sacrifice:
res illum divinas apud eos deos in suo sacrario quotidie facere vidisti,
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 8, § 18:
sacra pro civibus,
id. Balb. 24, 55:
sacrificium publicum,
id. Brut. 14, 56.— Absol.:
a sacris patriis Junonis Sospitae, cui omnes consules facere necesse est, consulem avellere,
Cic. Mur. 41, 90.—With abl.:
cum faciam vitula pro frugibus,
Verg. E. 3, 77:
catulo,
Col. 2, 22, 4.— Pass. impers.:
cum pro populo fieret,
Cic. Att. 1, 13, 3:
quibus diis decemviri ex libris ut fieret, ediderunt,
Liv. 37, 3, 5.—
9.
In gram., to make, form in inflecting:
cur aper apri et pater patris faciat?
Quint. 1, 6, 13; so id. 14; 15; 27; cf.:
sic genitivus Achilli et Ulixi fecit,
id. 1, 5, 63; 1, 6, 26:
eadem (littera) fecit ex duello bellum,
id. 1, 4, 15.—
10.
In late Lat., (se) facere aliquo, to betake one's self to any place:
intra limen sese facit,
App. 5, p. 159, 25;
without se: homo meus coepit ad stelas facere,
Petr. 62:
ad illum ex Libya Hammon facit,
Tert. Pall. 3.—
11.
Peculiar phrases.
a.
Quid faciam (facias, fiet, etc.), with abl., dat., or (rare) with de, what is to be done with a person or thing? quid hoc homine facias? Cic. Sest. 13, 29; id. Verr. 2, 2, 16, § 40:
nescit quid faciat auro,
Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 100:
quid tu huic homini facias?
Cic. Caecin. 11, 30; cf.:
quid enim tibi faciam,
id. Att. 7, 3, 2: quid faceret huic conclusioni, i. e. how should he refute, etc., id. Ac. 2, 30, 96:
quid facias illi?
Hor. S. 1, 1, 63:
miserunt Delphos consultum quidnam facerent de rebus suis,
Nep. Them. 2: quid fecisti scipione? what have you done with the stick? or, what has become of it? Plaut. Cas. 5, 4, 6; cf. id. ib. 5, 4, 9.—In pass.:
quid Tulliola mea fiet?
Cic. Fam. 14, 4, 3:
quid illo fiet? quid me?
id. Att. 6, 1, 14:
quid fiet artibus?
id. Ac. 2, 33, 107:
quid mihi fiet?
Ov. A. A. 1, 536:
quid de illa fiet fidicina igitur?
Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 48: de fratre quid fiet? Ter. Ad. 5, 9, 39.— Absol.:
quid faciat Philomela? fugam custodia claudit?
Ov. M. 6, 572:
quid facerem? neque servitio me exire licebat, etc.,
Verg. E. 1, 41 al. —
b.
Fit, factum est aliquo or aliqua re, it happens to, becomes of a person or thing:
volo Erogitare, meo minore quid sit factum filio,
Plaut. Capt. 5, 1, 32:
nec quid deinde iis (elephantis) factum sit, auctores explicant,
Plin. 8, 6, 6, § 17:
quid eo est argento factum?
Plaut. Most. 3, 1, 106.—Hence,
(β).
Esp., si quid factum sit aliquo, if any thing should happen to one (i. q. si quid acciderit humanitus), euphemistically for if one should die:
si quid eo factum esset, in quo spem essetis habituri?
Cic. de Imp. Pomp. 20, 59; cf.:
eum fecisse aiunt, sibi quod faciendum fuit,
Plaut. Poen. 5, 1, 23. —
c.
Ut fit, as it usually happens, as is commonly the case:
praesertim cum, ut fit, fortuito saepe aliquid concluse apteque dicerent,
Cic. Or. 53, 177:
queri, ut fit, incipiunt,
id. Verr. 2, 2, 23, § 56:
dum se uxor, ut fit, comparat,
id. Mil. 10, 28:
fecit statim, ut fit, fastidium copia,
Liv. 3, 1, 7.—
d.
Fiat, an expression of assent, so be it! very good! fiat, geratur mos tibi, Plaut. Ps. 1, 5, 146; id. As. 1, 1, 27; id. Am. 2, 2, 138; id. Most. 4, 3, 44 al.—
e.
Dictum ac factum, no sooner said than done, without delay, at once; v. dictum under dico, A. d.—
12.
In certain phrases the ellipsis of facere is common, e. g. finem facere:
Quae cum dixisset, Cotta finem,
Cic. N. D. 3, 40, 94; id. Fin. 4, 1 init. —With nihil aliud quam, quid alium quam, nihil praeterquam, which often = an emphatic Engl. only (but not in Cic.):
Tissaphernes nihil aliud quam bellum comparavit,
Nep. Ages. 2:
per biduum nihil aliud quam steterunt parati,
Liv. 34, 46; Suet. Caes. 20; id. Aug. 83; Liv. 2, 63; 4, 3; 3, 26.—So with nihil amplius quam, nihil prius quam, nihil minus quam, Liv. 26, 20; 35, 11; Suet. Dom. 3.
II.
Neutr.
A.
With adverbs, to do, deal, or act in any manner:
recta et vera loquere, sed neque vere neque recte adhuc Fecisti umquam,
Plaut. Capt. 5, 2, 7;
v. recte under rego: bene fecit Silius, qui transegerit,
Cic. Att. 12, 24, 1:
seu recte seu perperam,
to do right or wrong, id. Quint. 8, 31:
Dalmatis di male faciant,
id. Fam. 5, 11 fin.:
facis amice,
in a friendly manner, id. Lael. 2, 9; cf.:
per malitiam,
maliciously, id. Rosc. Com. 7, 21:
humaniter,
id. Q. Fr. 2, 1, 1:
imperite,
id. Leg. 1, 1, 4:
tutius,
Quint. 5, 10, 68:
voluit facere contra huic aegre,
Ter. Eun. 4, 1, 10: bene facere, to profit, benefit (opp. male facere, to hurt, injure), Ter. Ad. 5, 8, 25; 5, 7, 19; Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 22; id. Capt. 5, 2, 23; v. also under benefacio and benefactum.—
B.
Facere cum or ab aliquo, to take part with one, to side with one; and opp. contra (or adversus) aliquem, to take part against one:
si respondisset, idem sentire et secum facere Sullam,
Cic. Sull. 13, 36; cf.:
cum illo consulem facere,
id. Att. 6, 8, 2; and:
secum consules facere,
id. Planc. 35, 86:
auctoritatem sapientissimorum hominum facere nobiscum,
id. Caecin. 36, 104; cf.:
rem et sententiam interdicti mecum facere fatebatur,
id. ib. 28, 79:
cum veritas cum hoc faciat,
is on his side, id. Quint. 30, 91:
commune est, quod nihilo magis ab adversariis quam a nobis facit,
id. Inv. 1, 48, 90:
omnes damnatos, omnes ignominia affectos illac (a or cum Caesare) facere,
id. Att. 7, 3, 5:
quae res in civitate duae plurimum possunt, eae contra nos ambae faciunt in hoc tempore,
id. Quint. 1, 1:
neque minus eos cum quibus steterint quam adversus quos fecerint,
Nep. Eum. 8, 2:
cum aliquo non male facere,
to be on good terms with, Ov. Am. 3, 762.—
C.
In late Lat. facere cum aliqua = vivere cum aliqua, to live in matrimony, to be married, Inscr. Orell. 4646. —
D.
Ad aliquid, alicui, or absol., to be good or of use for any thing; to be useful, of service:
chamaeleon facit ad difficultatem urinae,
Plin. 22, 18, 21, § 46; Scrib. Comp. 122:
ad talem formam non facit iste locus,
Ov. H. 16, 190; cf. id. ib. 6, 128; id. Am. 1, 2, 16 al.:
radix coronopi coeliacis praeclare facit,
Plin. 22, 19, 22, § 48; so with dat., Plin. Val. 2, 1; Prop. 3 (4), 1, 20:
facit autem commode ea compositio, quam, etc.,
Col. 7, 5, 7; 8, 17, 13:
nec caelum, nec aquae faciunt, nec terra, nec aurae,
do not benefit me, Ov. Tr. 3, 8, 23:
mire facit in peroratione confessio,
Quint. 11, 3, 173; 171; cf. with a subject-clause: plurimum facit, totas diligenter [p. 718] nosse causas, id. 6, 4, 8: ad aliquid or alicui signifies also to suit, fit:
non faciet capiti dura corona meo,
Prop. 3, 1, 19; cf. Ov. H. 16, 189.—
E.
Like the Gr. poiein or dran, and the Engl. to do, instead of another verb (also for esse and pati):
factum cupio (sc. id esse),
Plaut. Truc. 4, 4, 24:
factum volo,
id. Bacch. 3, 3, 91; id. Most. 3, 2, 104:
an Scythes Anacharsis potuit pro nihilo pecuniam ducere, nostrates philosophi facere non potuerunt?
Cic. Tusc. 5, 32, 90:
nihil his in locis nisi saxa et montes cogitabam: idque ut facerem, orationibus inducebar tuis,
id. Leg. 2, 1, 2; cf.:
Demosthenem, si illa pronuntiare voluisset, ornate splendideque facere potuisse,
id. Off. 1, 1 fin.; and:
cur Cassandra furens futura prospiciat, Priamus sapiens hoc idem facere nequeat?
id. Div. 1, 39, 85; so id. Ac. 2, 33, 107; id. Att. 1, 16, 13; Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 18, 2; Nep. Chabr. 3, 4; 4, 3 al.:
vadem te ad mortem tyranno dabis pro amico, ut Pythagoreus ille Siculo fecit tyranno (here also with the case of the preceding verb),
Cic. Fin. 2, 24 fin. (v. Madv. ad h. l. p. 278):
jubeas (eum) miserum esse, libenter quatenus id facit (i. e. miser est),
what he is doing, Hor. S. 1, 1, 64:
in hominibus solum existunt: nam bestiae simile quiddam faciunt (i. q. patiuntur or habent),
Cic. Tusc. 4, 14; so,
ne facias quod Ummidius quidam (= ne idem experiaris, ne idem tibi eveniat),
Hor. S. 1, 1, 94. —
F.
Facere omitted, especially in short sentences expressing a judgment upon conduct, etc.:
at stulte, qui non modo non censuerit, etc.,
Cic. Off. 3, 27, 101.—Hence,
1.
factus, a, um, P. a.
A.
As adjective ante-class. and very rare:
factius nihilo facit, sc. id, i. e. nihilo magis effectum reddit,
is no nearer bringing it about, Plaut. Trin. 2, 3, 6; cf. Lorenz ad loc.—Far more freq.,
B.
In the neutr. as subst.: factum, i ( gen. plur. factum, Enn. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 31, 66 Trag. 81), that which is done, a deed, act, exploit, achievement (syn.: res gestae, facinus).
1.
In gen.:
depingere,
Ter. Phorm. 1, 5, 38:
facere factum,
Plaut. Truc. 2, 7, 5; id. Mil. 3, 1, 139:
dicta et facta,
Ter. Eun. 5, 4, 19; id. Heaut. 4, 5, 12:
opus facto est,
id. Phorm. 4, 5, 4:
ecquod hujus factum aut commissum non dicam audacius, sed, etc.,
Cic. Sull. 26, 72: meum factum probari abs te triumpho gaudio, Caes. ap. Cic. Att. 9, 16, A. 1;
14, 9, 2: quod umquam eorum in re publica forte factum exstitit?
id. ib. 8, 14, 2:
praeclarum atque divinum,
id. Phil. 2, 44, 114:
egregium,
id. Fam. 10, 16, 2; id. Cael. 10, 23:
factum per se improbabile,
Quint. 7, 4, 7; 6, 1, 22:
illustre,
Nep. Arist. 2, 2; cf.:
illustria et gloriosa,
Cic. Fin. 1, 11, 37:
forte,
id. Att. 8, 14, 2:
dira,
Ov. M. 6, 533:
nefanda,
id. H. 14, 16 al.; but also with the adv.:
recte ac turpiter factum,
Caes. B. G. 7, 80, 5; cf.:
multa huius (Timothei) sunt praeclare facta sed haec maxime illustria,
Nep. Timoth. 1, 2;
v. Zumpt, Gram. § 722, 2: dimidium facti, qui coepit, habet,
Hor. Ep. 1, 2, 40:
quo facto aut dicto adest opus,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 15 et saep.:
famam extendere factis,
Verg. A. 10, 468: non hominum video. non ego facta boum, doings, i. e. works, Ov. H. 10, 60.—
2.
In partic., bonum factum, like the Gr. agathê tuchê, a good deed, i. e. well done, fortunate (ante-class. and post-Aug.):
bonum factum'st, edicta ut servetis mea,
Plaut. Poen. prol. 16; cf. id. ib. 44; cf.:
hoc factum est optimum, ut, etc.,
id. Ps. 1, 2, 52:
majorum bona facta,
Tac. A. 3, 40; cf. id. ib. 3, 65. —At the commencement of edicts, Suet. Caesar, 80; id. Vit. 14; Aur. Vict. Vir. Ill. 49, 17; Tert. Pudic. 1.—(But in the class. per. factum in this sense is a participle, and is construed with an adv.:
bene facta,
Sall. C. 8, 5; id. J. 85, 5; Cic. Tusc. 2, 26, 64:
recte, male facta,
id. Off. 2, 18, 62:
male facto exigua laus proponitur,
id. Leg. Agr. 2, 2, 5; id. Brut. 43, 322; Quint. 3, 7, 13; cf. Krebs, Antibarb. p. 460).—
* 2.
facteon, a word jestingly formed by Cicero, after the analogy of the Greek, for faciendum: quare, ut opinor, philosophêteon, id quod tu facis, et istos consulatus non flocci facteon, Cic. Att. 1, 16, 13 Orell. N. cr. (for facteon, Ernesti has eateon).

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > facio

11 παρίστημι

παρίστημι,

A causal in [tense] pres., [tense] impf., [tense] fut., and [tense] aor.1 ; later [tense] pf. παρέστᾰκα in same sense, PTeb.5.196 (ii B.C.), Plb.3.94.7, S.E. M.7.273, etc.

I cause to stand, place beside, π. τοὺς ἱππεῖς ἐφ' ἑκάτερον τὸ κέρας Plb.3.72.9
, cf. 3.113.8 ; παραστήσας τὰ ὅπλα having brought his arms into view, D.18.175 ; π. τινὰ φυλάττειν set one near a thing to guard it, v.l. in Id.49.35 ; π. σορὸν σορῷ Anatolian Studies p.204
([place name] Termessus).

II set before the mind, present, ὑπόθεσιν.. οὐ χὶ τὴν οὖσαν παριστάντες ὑμῖν D.3.1
; τοῦτο π. τοὺς θεοὺς ὑμῖν that they may put this into your minds, Id.18.1 ; τὸ δεινὸν π. τοῖς ἀκούουσιν Id.21.72
; π. ἐλπίδας, ὁτιοῦν τῶν δεινοτάτων, Id.19.333, 21.15 ; arouse, inspire, οὐ γὰρ ἡ πληγὴ παρέστησε τὴν ὀργὴν ἀλλ' ἡ ἀτιμία ib.72 ; π. φόβον καὶ ἀπορίαν ταῖς πόλεσι Plb.3.94.7
; π. ὁ κίνδυνος διαλογισμόν, μὴ.. Aeschin.2.159 : so τοῦτο π. ὑμῖν γνῶναι prompt you to that decision, D.18.8 ; π. τινὶ θαρρεῖν give one confidence, v.l. in Aeschin.1.174 ; π. τινί c. inf., put it into his head to.., Paus.9.14.6 ; also π. τινὶ ὅτι or ὡς .., X. Oec.13.1, Pl.R. 600c.

2 dispose a person, πρὸς μελαγχολίας Phld. Ir.p.28
W., cf. Mus.p.73 K. ; also Ἀθηναίους ἄλλα παρέστησεν ὡς ἥρωα τιμᾶν Θησέα Plu. Thes.35
:—also in [voice] Pass., V. B. V. 1.

3 of a Poet, represent, describe, τὸν Νέστορα παρέστησε [ὁ ποιητὴς] πείθοντα Phld. Hom. p.65
O., cf. Ath.3.110f, 4.133b ; δι' ἐτυμολογίας Corn. ND1
:—[voice] Pass., παριστάσθω ὅτι .. let it be stated that.., S.E. M.7.310.

4 furnish, supply, deliver, PCair.Zen.790.10 (iii B.C.), PTeb.5.196 (ii B.C.), Abh. Berl.Akad.1925(5).31 ([place name] Cyrene).

5 make good, prove, show, τι πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις Lys.12.51
, cf. Act.Ap.24.13 ; καθάπερ προϊόντες -στήσομεν Phld. Ir.p.85
W., cf. Mus.p.37 K.

6 c. acc. pers., present, offer, ἑαυτοὺς τῷ θεῷ, ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, Ep.Rom.6.13,16.

b commend, βρῶμα ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ θεῷ 1 Ep.Cor.8.8
.

7 render, [ἡ πίσσα] τὸν οἶνον ἔὔποτον παρίστησι ταχέως Plu.2.676c
.

8 in later Greek, as in [voice] Med. (V. C. 1), produce in court, etc., BGU759.22 (ii A.D.), etc.:—[voice] Pass., Sammelb.4512.82 (ii B.C.), etc.

III set side by side, compare, [πόλεις] μικρὰς μεγάλαις Isoc. 12.40
.—The use of these act. tenses occurs in Pl.l.c., but first becomes common in Oratt.

B [voice] Pass., with [tense] aor. 2, [tense] pf. and [tense] plpf. [voice] Act., intr.:

I stand by, beside, or near, θέων δέ οἱ ἄγχι παρέστη Il.15.442
, cf. 483 ; ἀμφίπολος δ' ἄρα οἱ κεδνὴ ἑκάτερθε παρέστη Od.1.335
, cf. 8.218, 18.183 ; ἑξείης πάντεσσι παρίστασαι, of a beggar, 17.450 ; οὐδ' ἄρα οἵ τις ἀνουτητί γε παρέστη Il.22.371
; ζωγράφῳ παρεστηκυῖα, of a painter's model, X. Mem.3.11.2 : freq. in part. παραστάς with a Verb, εἶπε παραστάς Il.12.60
; οὖτα π. 20.472 ; παρασταθείς, v.l. for κατασταθείς, E.Or. 365.

2 stand by, i.e. help, defend, τινι Il.10.279, etc. ; Τρωσὶ παρεστάμεναι καὶ ἀμύνειν 21.231
, cf. 15.255 ; Ὀδυσῆϊ π. ἠδ' ἐπαρήγει 23.783
, cf. Hes. Th. 439, Hdt.1.87, etc.; π. τινὶ χερσί S. Aj. 1384
; βοηθοὶ π. X. Cyr.5.3.19 ; οὐ παρέστη οὐδ' ἐβοήθησεν D.45.64
.

II more freq. in past tenses, to have come, δεῦρο παρέστης Il.3.405
; to be at hand, νῆες δ' ἐκ Λήμνοιο παρέστασαν 7.467
, etc.

2 of events, to be near, be at hand, ἀλλά τοι ἤδη ἄγχι παρέστηκεν θάνατος 16.853
; κακὴ Διὸς αἶσα παρέστη ἡμῖν Od.9.52
, cf. 16.280 : in [tense] fut. [voice] Med., σοὶ..παραστήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν μοῖρ' ὀλοή 24.28
; ἐάν του καιρὸς ἢ χρεία παραστῇ D. 21.101
, cf. 73: freq. in [tense] pf., παρέστηχ' ὡς ἔοικ' ἀγὼν μέγας E. Hec. 229
, cf. Med. 331 ; in part., τὸ χρῶμα τὸ παρεστηκός Ar. Eq. 399
; ὁ νῦν παρεστηκὼς ἡμῖν λόγος Pl. Lg. 962d
: in [dialect] Att. form παρεστώς, ῶσα, ός, th=s parestw/shs no/sou S. Ph. 734 ; τοῦ π. θέρους ib. 1340 ; τὰς παρεστώσας τύχας E. Or.[ 1024]
; τὰ παρεστῶτα present circumstances, τὰ λῷστα, κράτιστα τῶν π., A. Ag. 1053, Pr. 218 ; πρὸς τὸ παρεστός Ar. Eq. 564
; πρὸς τὸ παριστάμενον X. Eq.Mag.9.1
.

III come to the side of another, come over to his opinion, παραστῆναι ἐς τῶν Περσέων τὴν γνώμην Hdt.6.99
: abs., come to terms, surrender, submit, Id.3.13,5.65, 6.140 ; οἱ πολέμιοι παραστήσονται Id.3.155
; τῷ πολέμῳ παραστῆναι D. 22.15
, cf. EM653.2.

IV happen to one, τῷ δὴ λέγουσι.. θῶμα μέγιστον παραστῆναι Hdt.1.23
; τὸ φρονεῖν ἀλλοῖα παρίσταται Emp. 108
; esp. come into one's head, occur to one, τὼς νόος ἀνθρώποισι παριστᾶται Parm.16.2
; δόξα μοι παρεστάθη ναοὺς ἱκέσθαι S. OT 911
; δόξα π. τινὶ ὥστε .. Pl.Phd. 66b ; σοὶ τοῦτο παρέστηκεν, ὡς .. Id.Phdr. 233c ; π. θαῦμα, γνώμη, And.2.2, 24 (s.v.l.) ; ἔκπληξις παρέστη Th.8.96
: impers., παρίσταταί μοι it occurs to me ; τῷ οὐ παραστήσεται.. τεθνάναι βούλεσθαι to whom it will not occur to wish for death, Hdt.7.46: folld. by ὡς, Th. 4.61,95, Lys. 12.62, etc.: c. inf., Id.7.17; οὐχὶ παρίσταταί μοι ταὐτὰ γιγνώσκειν D.3.1
: c. acc. et inf., Lys.21.12, Pl.Phd. 58e; part., τὸ παριστάμενον that which comes into one's head, a thought, Luc. Cont. 13 ; ἐκ τοῦ π. λέγειν speak offhand, Plu.Dem.9, cf. Gal. 14.295.

V to be disposed, πρὸς τὰς πράξεις Phld.Mus.p.71
K.; εἰρηνικῶς παρεστ ώτων Id.Hom. p.45
O.

2 collect oneself, παραστῆναι πρὸς τὸν κίνδυνον D.S. 17.43
; τῷ θυμῷ παραστάς ib.99 ; π. πρὸς τὴν ἀπολογίαν Plu. Alc. 19
; παρεστηκότες ταῖς γνώμαις Arr.Fr. 161
J.

3 metaph., οἶνος παρίσταται the wine improves, becomes fit for drinking, opp. ἐξίσταται, Thphr. CP6.14.10, cf. Dsc.5.8.

b of a crop, to be ripe, ὅταν ὁ πρώϊμος σπόρος παραστῇ OGI56.68
(Egypt, iii B. C.); so prob. ἡ γῆ παρέστηκεν PLille 8.5
(iii B. C.).

VI παρεστηκέναι φρενῶν to be beside oneself, lose one's wits, Plb.18.53.6 ; π. ταῖς διανοίαις Id.14.5.7
, etc.; ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον π. Id.22.8.13 ; cf. παρεξίστημι 11
.

2 to be passionately devoted to, ἵπποισι παρεστεῶτες Hp.Ep.17
.

VII abs., παρεστηκός, = παρόν, since it was in their power, since the opportunity offered, Th.4.133.

C Some tenses of [voice] Med., [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. sts., [tense] fut. and [tense] aor. I almost always (for exceptions, v. supr. B. 11.2, III, iv), are used in causal sense:

I set by one's side, bring forward, produce, π. ἱερεῖα X.An.6.1.22
; esp. in a court of justice, τοὺς παῖδας παραστησάμενοι Lys.20.35
; παιδία παραστήσεται (of a culprit) D.21.99 ; ταῦτα παραστησάμενος ib.187; μάρτυρας παρίστανται Is.4.13
, etc.; παραστήσασθαί τινα produce him as witness, Id.9.9, D.34.28, etc.; π. τινὰ εἰς κρίσιν Pl.R. 555b
.

2 commend, τινί τινα J.AJ 15.7.3
.

II bring to one's side, bring over by force, bring to terms, ἀέκοντας παραστήσασθαι Hdt. 8.80
; π. βία S.OC 916
; π. πολιορκίᾳ Th.1.98
; πολιορκοῦντας π. ὁμολογίᾳ ib.29 : abs., π. τινά, π. πόλιν, Hdt.3.45, Th.1.124, etc.; τοὺς οἰκοῦντας τὴν Ἀττικὴν π. εἰς φορὰν δασμοῦ Pl.Lg. 706b
.

2 generally, dispose for one's own views or purposes, τινὰ παραστήσασθαι οὕτως ὥστε .. so to dispose a person that.., Hdt.4.136 ; ἑαυτοὺς πρὸς τὴν μάχην Plb.3.109.9
; dispose, induce a person, πρὸς τὸ κοινωνεῖν Id.29.3.5
: c. acc. et inf., Chio Ep.3.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > παρίστημι

12 καί

καί conjunction (Hom.+), found most frequently by far of all Gk. particles in the NT; since it is not only used much more commonly here than in other Gk. lit. but oft. in a different sense, or rather in different circumstances, it contributes greatly to some of the distinctive coloring of the NT style.—HMcArthur, ΚΑΙ Frequency in Greek Letters, NTS 15, ’68/69, 339–49. The vivacious versatility of κ. (for earlier Gk. s. Denniston 289–327) can easily be depressed by the tr. ‘and’, whose repetition in a brief area of text lacks the support of arresting aspects of Gk. syntax.

① marker of connections, and

ⓐ single words

α. gener. Ἰάκωβος καὶ Ἰωσὴφ καὶ Σίμων καὶ Ἰούδας Mt 13:55. χρυσὸν καὶ λίβανον καὶ σμύρναν 2:11. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή Ro 7:12. πολυμερῶς κ. πολυτρόπως Hb 1:1. ὁ θεὸς κ. πατήρ God, who is also the Father 1 Cor 15:24; cp. 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; Js 1:27; 3:9 al.—Connects two occurrences of the same word for emphasis (OGI 90, 19 [196 B.C.] Ἑρμῆς ὁ μέγας κ. μέγας; pap in Mayser II/1, 54) μείζων κ. μείζων greater and greater Hv 4, 1, 6. ἔτι κ. ἔτι again and again B 21:4; Hs 2, 6 (B-D-F §493, 1; 2; s. Rob. 1200).

β. w. numerals, w. the larger number first δέκα καὶ ὁκτώ Lk 13:16. τεσσεράκοντα κ. ἕξ J 2:20. τετρακόσιοι κ. πεντήκοντα Ac 13:20.—The καί in 2 Cor 13:1 ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα=‘or’ ([v.l. ἢ τριῶν for καὶ τριῶν as it reads Mt 18:16]; cp. Js 4:13 v.l. σήμερον καὶ αὔριον=‘today or tomorrow’, but s. above all Thu. 1, 82, 2; Pla., Phd. 63e; X., De Re Equ. 4, 4 ἁμάξας τέτταρας καὶ πέντε; Heraclides, Pol. 58 τρεῖς καὶ τέσσαρας; Polyb. 3, 51, 12 ἐπὶ δυεῖν καὶ τρισὶν ἡμέραις; 5, 90, 6; Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 2, 28 εἷς καὶ δύο=one or two; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1091 p. 305, 22 W. τριέτης καὶ τετραέτης) by the statement of two or three witnesses every charge must be sustained, as explained by Dt 19:15.

γ. adding the whole to the part and in general (Aristoph., Nub. 1239 τὸν Δία καὶ τοὺς θεούς; Thu. 1, 116, 3; 7, 65, 1) Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι Peter and the rest of the apostles Ac 5:29. οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς κ. τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον the high priest and all the rest of the council Mt 26:59. Vice versa, adding a (specially important) part to the whole and especially (πᾶς Ἰουδὰ καὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ 2 Ch 35:24; cp. 32, 33; 1 Macc 2:6) τοῖς μαθηταῖς κ. τῷ Πέτρῳ Mk 16:7. σὺν γυναιξὶ κ. Μαριάμ Ac 1:14.

δ. The expr. connected by καί can be united in the form of a hendiadys (Alcaeus 117, 9f D.² χρόνος καὶ καρπός=time of fruit; Soph., Aj. 144; 749; Polyb. 6, 9, 4; 6, 57, 5 ὑπεροχὴ καὶ δυναστεία=1, 2, 7; 5, 45, 1 ὑπεροχὴ τῆς δυναστείας; Diod S 5, 67, 3 πρὸς ἀνανέωσιν καὶ μνήμην=renewal of remembrance; 15, 63, 2 ἀνάγκη καὶ τύχη=compulsion of fate; 16, 93, 2 ἐπιβουλὴ κ. θάνατος=a fatal plot; Jos., Ant. 12, 98 μετὰ χαρᾶς κ. βοῆς=w. a joyful cry; 17, 82 ἀκρίβεια κ. φυλακή) ἐξίσταντο ἐπὶ τῇ συνέσει καὶ ταῖς ἀποκρίσεσιν αὐτοῦ they were amazed at his intelligent answers Lk 2:47. δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα κ. σοφίαν I will give you wise utterance 21:15. τροφὴ κ. εὐφροσύνη joy concerning (your) food Ac 14:17. ἐλπὶς κ. ἀνάστασις hope of a resurrection 23:6 (2 Macc 3:29 ἐλπὶς καὶ σωτηρία; s. OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f; GBjörck, ConNeot 4, ’40, 1–4).

ε. A colloquial feature is the coordination of two verbs, one of which should be a ptc. (s. B-D-F §471; Rob. 1135f) ἀποτολμᾷ κ. λέγει = ἀποτολμῶν λέγει he is so bold as to say Ro 10:20. ἔσκαψεν κ. ἐβάθυνεν (=βαθύνας) Lk 6:48. ἐκρύβη κ. ἐξῆλθεν (=ἐξελθών) J 8:59. Sim. χαίρων κ. βλέπων I am glad to see Col 2:5. Linking of subordinate clause and ptc. Μαριὰμ ὡς ἦλθεν … καὶ ἰδοῦσα J 11:32 v.l. Cp. παραλαβών … καὶ ἀνέβη Lk 9:28 v.l.

ⓑ clauses and sentences

α. gener.: ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει κ. τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). εἰσῆλθον … κ. ἐδίδασκον Ac 5:21. διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ κ. συνάξει τὸν σῖτον Mt 3:12. κεκένωται ἡ πίστις καὶ κατήργηται ἡ ἐπαγγελία Ro 4:14 and very oft. Connecting two questions Mt 21:23, or quotations (e.g. Ac 1:20), and dialogue (Lk 21:8), or alternate possibilities (13:18).

β. Another common feature is the practice, drawn fr. Hebrew or fr. the speech of everyday life, of using κ. as a connective where more discriminating usage would call for other particles: καὶ εἶδον καὶ (for ὅτι) σεισμὸς ἐγένετο Rv 6:12. καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς … καὶ (for ὅτι) ἔλεγον and the king learned that they were saying Mk 6:14 (s. HLjungvik, ZNW 33, ’34, 90–92; on this JBlinzler, Philol. 96, ’43/44, 119–31). τέξεται υἱὸν καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (for οὗ τὸ ὄνομα καλ.) Mt 1:21; cp. Lk 6:6; 11:44. καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι καὶ ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς Mk 9:5. Esp. freq. is the formula in historical narrative καὶ ἐγένετο … καὶ (like וַ … וַיְהִי) and it happened or came about … that Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15; Lk 5:1 v.l. (for ἐγένετο δὲ … καὶ; so also the text of 6:12), 12, 17; 14:1; 17:11 al. (Gen 7:10 al.; JosAs 11:1; 22:1). S. MJohannessohn, Das bibl. Καὶ ἐγένετο u. seine Geschichte, 1926 (fr. ZVS 35, 1925, 161–212); KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 29–62; Mlt-Turner 334f; ÉDelebecque, Études Grecques sur L’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65; JVoelz, The Language of the NT: ANRW II/25/2, 893–977, esp. 959–64.—As in popular speech, κ. is used in rapid succession Mt 14:9ff; Mk 1:12ff; Lk 18:32ff; J 2:13ff; 1 Cor 12:5f; Rv 6:12ff; 9:1ff. On this kind of colloquial speech, which joins independent clauses rather than subordinating one to the other (parataxis rather than hypotaxis) s. B-D-F §458; Rdm.² p. 222; Rob. 426; Dssm., LO 105ff (LAE 129ff), w. many references and parallels fr. secular sources. This is a favorite, e.g., in Polyaenus 2, 3, 2–4; 2, 4, 3; 3, 9, 10; 3, 10, 2; 4, 6, 1; 7, 36 al.

γ. It is also coordination rather than subordination when κ. connects an expr. of time with that which occurs in the time (Od. 5, 362; Hdt. 7, 217; Thu. 1, 50, 5; Pla., Symp. 220c; Aeschin. 3, 71 νὺξ ἐν μέσῳ καὶ παρῆμεν; s. B-D-F §442, 4; KBrugmann⁴-AThumb, Griechische Gramm. 1913, 640*): ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα κ. παραδίδοται the time has come when he is to be given up Mt 26:45. κ. ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν when they crucified him Mk 15:25. κ. ἀνέβη εἰς Ἰεροσόλυμα when he went up to Jerusalem J 2:13. κ. συντελέσω when I will make Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31); cp. J 4:35; 7:33; Lk 19:43; 23:44; Ac 5:7.

δ. καί introducing an apodosis is really due to Hebr./LXX infl. (B-D-F §442, 7; Abel §78a, 6 p. 341; Mlt-H. 422; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 66–72; but not offensive to ears trained in good Gk.: s. Il. 1, 478; Hdt. 1, 79, 2; sim.Thu. 2, 93, 4 ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐχώρουν εὐθύς; 8, 27, 5; Herm. Wr. 13, 1 …, καὶ ἔφης; Delebecque [s. above in β] 130–32) καὶ ὅτε ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ …, κ. ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 3:20. Also κ. ἰδού in an apodosis Lk 7:12; Ac 1:10.

ε. connecting negative and affirmative clauses Lk 3:14. οὔτε ἄντλημα ἔχεις κ. τὸ φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαθύ you have no bucket, and the well is deep J 4:11; cp. 3J 10 (οὔτε … καί Eur., Iph. Taur. 591f; Longus, Past. 1, 17; 4, 28; Aelian, NA 1, 57; 11, 9; Lucian, Dial. Meretr. 2, 4 οὔτε πάντα ἡ Λεσβία, Δωρί, πρὸς σὲ ἐψεύσατο καὶ σὺ τἀληθῆ ἀπήγγελκας Μυρτίῳ ‘It wasn’t all lies that Lesbia told you, Doris; and you certainly reported the truth to Myrtium’). After a negative clause, which influences the clause beginning w. καί: μήποτε καταπατήσουσιν … κ. στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς Mt 7:6; cp. 5:25; 10:38; 13:15 (Is 6:10); 27:64; Lk 12:58; 21:34; J 6:53; 12:40 (Is 6:10); Ac 28:27 (Is 6:10); 1 Th 3:5; Hb 12:15; Rv 16:15.

ζ. to introduce a result that comes fr. what precedes: and then, and so Mt 5:15; 23:32; Mk 8:34; 2 Cor 11:9; Hb 3:19; 1J 3:19. καὶ ἔχομεν and so we have 2 Pt 1:19. Esp. after the impv., or expr. of an imperatival nature (Soph., Oed. Col. 1410ff θέσθε … καὶ … οἴσει, El. 1207; Sir 2:6; 3:17) δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου καὶ ποιήσω and then I will make Mt 4:19. εἰπὲ λόγῳ, κ. ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου speak the word, and then my servant will be cured Mt 8:8; Lk 7:7; cp. Mt 7:7; Mk 6:22; Lk 10:28; J 14:16; Js 4:7, 10; Rv 4:1.—καί introduces a short clause that confirms the existence of someth. that ought to be: ἵνα τέκνα θεοῦ κληθῶμεν, καὶ ἐσμέν that we should be called children of God; and so we really are (καλέω 1d) 1J 3:1 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 40 §161 they were to conquer Sardinia, καὶ κατέλαβον=and they really took it; 4, 127 §531 one day would decide [κρίνειν] the fate of Rome, καὶ ἐκρίθη).

η. emphasizing a fact as surprising or unexpected or noteworthy: and yet, and in spite of that, nevertheless (Eur., Herc. Fur. 509; Philostrat., Her. 11 [II 184, 29 Kayser] ῥητορικώτατον καὶ δεινόν; Longus, Past. 4, 17 βουκόλος ἦν Ἀγχίσης καὶ ἔσχεν αὐτὸν Ἀφροδίτη) κ. σὺ ἔρχῃ πρὸς μέ; and yet you come to me? Mt 3:14; cp. 6:26; 10:29; Mk 12:12; J 1:5, 10; 3:11, 32; 5:40; 6:70; 7:28; 1 Cor 5:2; 2 Cor 6:9; Hb 3:9 (Ps 94:9); Rv 3:1. So also, connecting what is unexpected or otherw. noteworthy with an attempt of some kind (JBlomqvist, Das sogennante και adversativum ’79): but ζητεῖ κ. οὐχ εὑρίσκει but he finds none (no resting place) Mt 12:43. ἐπεθύμησαν ἰδεῖν κ. οὐχ εἶδαν but did not see (it) 13:17; cp. 26:60; Lk 13:7; 1 Th 2:18. Cp. GJs 18:3 (not pap). Perhaps Mk 5:20. Introducing a contrasting response καὶ ἀποδώσεις μοι Hv 2, 1, 3.

θ. to introduce an abrupt question, which may often express wonder, ill-will, incredulity, etc. (B-D-F §442, 8. For older lit. exx. of this usage s. Kühner-G. II p. 247f; for later times EColwell, The Gk. of the Fourth Gospel ’31, 87f): κ. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο; how have I deserved this? Lk 1:43. κ. τίς; who then? Mk 10:26; Lk 10:29; J 9:36. καὶ τί γέγονεν ὅτι … ; how does it happen that … ? 14:22. καὶ πῶς σὺ λέγεις … ; how is it, then, that you say … J 14:9 v.l. W. a protasis εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, κ. τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με; for if I make you sad, who then will cheer me up? 2 Cor 2:2 (cp. Ps.-Clem., Hom. 2, 43; 44 εἰ [ὁ θεὸς] ψεύδεται, καὶ τίς ἀληθεύει;). Thus Phil 1:22 is prob. to be punctuated as follows (s. ADebrunner, GGA 1926, 151): εἰ δὲ τὸ ζῆν ἐν σαρκί, τοῦτο μοι καρπὸς ἔργου, καὶ τί αἱρήσομαι; οὐ γνωρίζω but if living on here means further productive work, then which shall I choose? I really don’t know. καὶ πῶς αὐτοῦ υἱός ἐστιν; how, then, is he his son? Lk 20:44 (cp. Gen 39:9).

ι. to introduce a parenthesis (Eur., Orest. 4, Hel. 393; X., Equ. 11, 2.—B-D-F §465, 1; Rob. 1182) κ. ἐκωλύθην ἄρχι τοῦ δεῦρο but so far I have been prevented Ro 1:13.

ⓒ oft. explicative; i.e., a word or clause is connected by means of καί w. another word or clause, for the purpose of explaining what goes before it and so, that is, namely (PPetr II, 18 [1], 9 πληγὰς … καὶ πλείους=blows … indeed many of them.—Kühner-G. II 247; B-D-F §442, 9; Rob. 1181; Mlt-Turner 335) χάριν κ. ἀποστολήν grace, that is, the office of an apostle Ro 1:5. ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα καὶ τὰ τ. δαιμονιζομένων they told everything, namely what had happened to those who were possessed Mt 8:33. καὶ χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος that is, grace upon grace J 1:16. Cp. 1 Cor 3:5; 15:38.—Mt 21:5.—Other explicative uses are καὶ οὗτος, καὶ τοῦτο, καὶ ταῦτα (the first and last are in earlier Gk.: Hdt., X. et al.; s. Kühner-G. I 647; II 247) and, also ascensive and indeed, and at that Ἰ. Χρ., καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον J. Chr., (and) indeed him on the cross 1 Cor 2:2. καὶ τοῦτο Ro 13:11; 1 Cor 6:6, 8; Eph 2:8. καὶ ταῦτα w. ptc. and to be sure Hb 11:12. See B-D-F §290, 5; 425, 1; 442, 9.—The ascensive force of καί is also plain in Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον a Roman citizen, and uncondemned at that Ac 22:25. ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἐστιν an hour is coming, indeed it is already here J 5:25. προσέθηκεν καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ πᾶσιν καὶ κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ added this on top of everything else, namely to put John in prison Lk 3:20.

ⓓ After πολύς and before a second adj. καί is pleonastic fr. the viewpoint of modern lang. (earlier Gk.: Hom. et al. [Kühner-G. II 252, 1]; cp. Cebes 1, 1 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα ἀναθήματα; 2, 3; B-D-F §442, 11) πολλὰ … κ. ἄλλα σημεῖα many other signs J 20:30 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 318). πολλὰ κ. βαρέα αἰτιώματα many severe charges Ac 25:7. πολλὰ … καὶ ἕτερα Lk 3:18 (cp. Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 6 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα). πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνυπότακτοι Tit 1:10.

ⓔ introducing someth. new, w. loose connection: Mt 4:23; 8:14, 23, 28; 9:1, 9, 27, 35; 10:1; 12:27; Mk 5:1, 21; Lk 8:26; J 1:19 and oft.

ⓕ καί … καί both … and, not only …, but also (Synes., Dreams 10 p. 141b καὶ ἀπιστεῖν ἔξεστι καὶ πιστεύειν.—B-D-F §444, 3; Rob. 1182; Mlt-Turner 335) connecting single expressions Mt 10:28; Mk 4:41; Ro 11:33; Phil 2:13; 4:12. κ. ἐν ὀλίγῳ κ. ἐν μεγάλῳ Ac 26:29. κ. ἅπαξ κ. δίς (s. ἅπαξ 1) Phil 4:16; 1 Th 2:18. Connecting whole clauses or sentences: Mk 9:13; J 7:28; 9:37; 12:28; 1 Cor 1:22. Introducing contrasts: although … yet (Anthol. VII, 676 Δοῦλος Ἐπίκτητος γενόμην καὶ σῶμʼ ἀνάπηρος καὶ πενίην ῏Ιρος καὶ φίλος ἀθανάτοις ‘I was Epictetus, a slave; crippled in body and an Iros [a beggar in Hom., Od.] in poverty, but dear to the Immortals’) J 15:24; Ac 23:3. καὶ … κ. οὐ Lk 5:36; J 6:36. καὶ οὐ … καί 17:25; κ. … κ. now … now Mk 9:22. On τὲ … καί s. τέ 2c. Somet. w. ἤ q.v. 1aβ.—HCadbury, Superfluous καί in the Lord’s Prayer (i.e. Mt 6:12) and Elsewhere: Munera Studiosa (=WHatch Festschr.) ’46.

② marker to indicate an additive relation that is not coordinate to connect clauses and sentences, also, likewise, funct. as an adv.

ⓐ simply κ. τὴν ἄλλην the other one also Mt 5:39; cp. vs. 40; 6:21; 12:45; Mk 1:38; 2:26; 8:7 and oft. Freq. used w. pronouns κἀγώ (q.v.). καὶ σύ Mt 26:73. κ. ὑμεῖς 20:4, 7; Lk 21:31; J 7:47 and oft. κ. αὐτός (s. αὐτός 1f).

ⓑ intensive: even Mt 5:46f; 10:30; Mk 1:27; Lk 10:17; J 14:9 v.l.; Ac 5:39; 22:28; Ro 9:24 (ἀλλὰ καί); 1 Cor 2:10; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 2:17; Eph 5:12; Phlm 21; Hb 7:25; 1 Pt 4:19 (but s. d below); Jd 23; Hs 5, 2, 10; 7:1; ἔτι καὶ νῦν Dg 2:3. CBlackman, JBL 87, ’68, 203f would transl. Ro 3:26b: … even in the act of declaring righteous (cp. the gen. abs. Polemon Soph. B 14 Reader καὶ Δάτιδος ἀποπλέοντος=even though Datis was sailing away). In formulas expressing a wish: ὄφελον καί if only, would that Gal 5:12. In connection w. a comparative: κ. περισσότερον προφήτου one who is even more than a prophet Mt 11:9. κ. μείζονα ποιήσει J 14:12.

ⓒ In sentences denoting a contrast καί appears in var. ways, somet. in both members of the comparison, and oft. pleonastically, to our way of thinking καθάπερ …, οὕτως καί as …, thus also 2 Cor 8:11. ὥσπερ …, οὕτως καί (Hyperid. 1, 2, 5–8) Ro 5:19; 11:30f; 1 Cor 11:12; 15:22; Gal 4:29. ὡς …, οὕτως καί Ro 5:15, 18. ὸ̔ν τρόπον …, οὕτως καί 2 Ti 3:8.—οὕτως καί thus also Ro 6:11. ὡσαύτως καί in the same way also 1 Cor 11:25. ὁμοίως καί (Jos., Bell. 2, 575) J 6:11; Jd 8. ὡς καί Ac 11:17; 1 Cor 7:7; 9:5. καθὼς καί Ro 15:7; 1 Cor 13:12; 2 Cor 1:14; Eph 4:17. καθάπερ καί Ro 4:6; 2 Cor 1:14.—καί can also stand alone in the second member w. the mng. so also, so. ὡς … καί Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20. καθὼς … καί Lk 6:31 v.l.; J 6:57; 13:15; 1 Cor 15:49.—οἷος …, τοιοῦτος καί 1 Cor 15:48. After a comp. ὅσῳ καί by so much also Hb 8:6. καί is found in both members of the comparison (s. Kühner-G. II 256; 2 Macc 2:10; 6:14) Ro 1:13; 1 Th 2:14. καθὼς καὶ … οὕτως καί Col 3:13 (cp. Hyperid. 1, 40, 20–25 ὥσπερ καὶ … οὕτω καί; 3, 38).

ⓓ w. expressions that introduce cause or result, here also pleonastic to a considerable degree διὰ τοῦτο καί for this reason (also) Lk 11:49; J 12:18. διὸ καί Lk 1:35; Ac 10:29; Ro 4:22; Hb 13:12. εἰς τοῦτο καί 2 Cor 2:9. ὥστε καί 1 Pt 4:19 (but this pass. may well fit in b). ὅθεν καί Hb 7:25; 11:19.

ⓔ after an interrogative (as Thu., X., et al.; s. Kühner-G. II 255. S. also B-D-F §442, 14) at all, still ἱνατί καὶ τ. γῆν καταργεῖ; Lk 13:7. τί καί; (Hyperid. 3, 14 τί καὶ ἀδικεῖ; what kind of wrong, then, is he committing?) τί καὶ ἐλπίζει; why does he still (need to) hope? Ro 8:24. v.l. τί καὶ βαπτίζονται; why are they baptized (at all)? 1 Cor 15:29; cp. vs. 30.

ⓕ used w. a relative, it oft. gives greater independence to the foll. relative clause: Mk 3:14; Lk 10:30; J 11:2 v.l.; Ac 1:3, 11; 7:45; 10:39; 11:30; 12:4; 13:22; 28:10; Ro 9:24; 1 Cor 11:23; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29 al.

ⓖ used pleonastically w. prep.

α. μετά (BGU 412, 6 μετὰ καὶ τ. υἱοῦ) Phil 4:3.

β. σύν (ins in PASA III 612; PFay 108; BGU 179, 19; 515, 17) 1 Cl 65:1.—Dssm., NB 93 (BS 265f).

ⓗ w. double names ὁ καί who is also called … (the earliest ex. in a fragment of Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 15, 51 p. 469, 23 Jac. ῏Ωχος καὶ Δαρειαῖος [s. Hatch 141]; OGI 565; 574; 583; 589; 603; 604; 620; 623; 636; POxy 45; 46; 54; 101; 485; 1279; PFay 30; BGU 22, 25; 36, 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 240; 5, 85; 12, 285; 13, 320; 18, 35. Further material in WSchmid, Der Atticismus III 1893, 338; Dssm., B 181ff [BS 313–17]. Lit. in B-D-F §268, 1) Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9. Ἰγνάτιος, ὁ καὶ Θεοφόρος ins of all the letters of Ign.

ⓘ with other particles

α. καὶ γάρ for (s. γάρ 1b).—καὶ γὰρ … ἀλλά (or granted that … but) 2 Cor 13:4; Phil 2:27.—καὶ γὰρ οὐ(κ): neither 1 Cor 11:9; for even … not 2 Cor 3:10.

β. καί γε (without intervening word [opp. earlier Gk, e.g. Pla., Phd. 58d; Rep. 7, 531a]: Hippocr., Septim. 9, VII 450 Littré; Cornutus p. 40, 12; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; Rhetor Apsines [III A.D.] p. 332, 17 Hammer; TestReub 4:4 al.; for גָּם always in Theod. [DBarthélemy, Les devanciers d’Aquila ’63, 31ff]), weakened force: (if) only or at least Lk 19:42 v.l.; intensive: indeed (Jos. Ant 29, 19) Ac 2:18 (J 3:2 v.l.; Mel., P. 30, 207); Hm 8:5; 9:9. καί γε οὐ μακράν= and indeed God is not far Ac 17:27.—Kühner-G. II 176b; Schwyzer II 561; B-D-F §439, 2; Rdm.² 35–37.

γ. καὶ … δέ and also, but also (s. δέ 5b).

δ. καίτοι (Il. 13, 267 et al., ins, pap; 4 Macc 2:6; 5:18; 7:13; Ath. 8, 1 al.; Mel., P. 58, 422) particle (B-D-F §425, 1; 450, 3; Rob. 1129 and 1154) w. finite verb (Chion, Ep. 3, 1; Jos. Ant. 5, 78) yet, on the other hand Ac 14:17. W. gen. abs. foll. (BGU 850, 4 [76 A.D.] καίτοι ἐμοῦ σε πολλὰ ἐρωτήσαντος; 898, 26; Philo, Vi. Mos. 1, 20; Jos., Ant. 2, 321; Ath. 19, 2; 25, 2) Hb 4:3.—καίτοι γε or καί τοι γε (since Aristoph., Ach. 611; but esp. in later Gk. [cp. Schwyzer II 561; MMeister, De Aiocho dial., Breslau diss. 1915 p. 31, 5]; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 364b; Jos., Bell. 1, 7, Ant. 5, 36; Epict. 3, 24, 90; Just., A II, 11, 2; D. 7, 3; Ath. 3, 1; 22, 7; SIG 685, 76 and 82 [139 B.C.]) although J 4:2; Ac 14:17 v.l.; Dg 8:3. W. part. foll. (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 230; Mel., P. 58, 422) AcPt Ox 849, 18.—Kühner-G. II 151f; B-D-F §439, 1; 450, 3.—For ἀλλὰ κ., δὲ και, ἐὰν κ., εἰ κ., ἢ κ. s. ἀλλά, δέ, ἐάν, εἰ, ἤ.—ERobson, KAI-Configurations in the Gk. NT, 3 vols. diss. Syracuse ’79. LfgrE s.v. καί col. 1273f (lit.). DELG. M-M. EDNT.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καί

13 Memory

   1) A Unitary Search Process for All the Phenomena of Memory

   To what extent can we lump together what goes on when you try to recall: (1) your name; (2) how you kick a football; and (3) the present location of your car keys? If we use introspective evidence as a guide, the first seems an immediate automatic response. The second may require constructive internal replay prior to our being able to produce a verbal description. The third... quite likely involves complex operational responses under the control of some general strategy system. Is any unitary search process, with a single set of characteristics and inputoutput relations, likely to cover all these cases? (Reitman, 1970, p. 485)

   2) Semantic Memory Is a Mental Thesaurus

   [Semantic memory] Is a mental thesaurus, organized knowledge a person possesses about words and other verbal symbols, their meanings and referents, about relations among them, and about rules, formulas, and algorithms for the manipulation of these symbols, concepts, and relations. Semantic memory does not register perceptible properties of inputs, but rather cognitive referents of input signals. (Tulving, 1972, p. 386)

   3) The Development of Mnemonic Codes

   The mnemonic code, far from being fixed and unchangeable, is structured and restructured along with general development. Such a restructuring of the code takes place in close dependence on the schemes of intelligence. The clearest indication of this is the observation of different types of memory organisation in accordance with the age level of a child so that a longer interval of retention without any new presentation, far from causing a deterioration of memory, may actually improve it. (Piaget & Inhelder, 1973, p. 36)

   4) The Logic of Some Memory Theorization Is of Dubious Worth in the History of Psychology

   If a cue was effective in memory retrieval, then one could infer it was encoded; if a cue was not effective, then it was not encoded. The logic of this theorization is "heads I win, tails you lose" and is of dubious worth in the history of psychology. We might ask how long scientists will puzzle over questions with no answers. (Solso, 1974, p. 28)

   5) The Constituent Elements of Memory Theory

   We have iconic, echoic, active, working, acoustic, articulatory, primary, secondary, episodic, semantic, short-term, intermediate-term, and longterm memories, and these memories contain tags, traces, images, attributes, markers, concepts, cognitive maps, natural-language mediators, kernel sentences, relational rules, nodes, associations, propositions, higher-order memory units, and features. (Eysenck, 1977, p. 4)

   6) The Problem with the Memory Metaphor

   The problem with the memory metaphor is that storage and retrieval of traces only deals [ sic] with old, previously articulated information. Memory traces can perhaps provide a basis for dealing with the "sameness" of the present experience with previous experiences, but the memory metaphor has no mechanisms for dealing with novel information. (Bransford, McCarrell, Franks & Nitsch, 1977, p. 434)

   7) The Results of a Hundred Years of the Psychological Study of Memory Are Somewhat Discouraging

   The results of a hundred years of the psychological study of memory are somewhat discouraging. We have established firm empirical generalisations, but most of them are so obvious that every ten-year-old knows them anyway. We have made discoveries, but they are only marginally about memory; in many cases we don't know what to do with them, and wear them out with endless experimental variations. We have an intellectually impressive group of theories, but history offers little confidence that they will provide any meaningful insight into natural behavior. (Neisser, 1978, pp. 12-13)

   8) The Structure and Function of a Schema in Memory

   A schema, then is a data structure for representing the generic concepts stored in memory. There are schemata representing our knowledge about all concepts; those underlying objects, situations, events, sequences of events, actions and sequences of actions. A schema contains, as part of its specification, the network of interrelations that is believed to normally hold among the constituents of the concept in question. A schema theory embodies a prototype theory of meaning. That is, inasmuch as a schema underlying a concept stored in memory corresponds to the mean ing of that concept, meanings are encoded in terms of the typical or normal situations or events that instantiate that concept. (Rumelhart, 1980, p. 34)

   9) Competence and Performance in Theories of Memory

   Memory appears to be constrained by a structure, a "syntax," perhaps at quite a low level, but it is free to be variable, deviant, even erratic at a higher level....

   Like the information system of language, memory can be explained in part by the abstract rules which underlie it, but only in part. The rules provide a basic competence, but they do not fully determine performance. (Campbell, 1982, pp. 228, 229)

    10) Metaphors of Memory

   When people think about the mind, they often liken it to a physical space, with memories and ideas as objects contained within that space. Thus, we speak of ideas being in the dark corners or dim recesses of our minds, and of holding ideas in mind. Ideas may be in the front or back of our minds, or they may be difficult to grasp. With respect to the processes involved in memory, we talk about storing memories, of searching or looking for lost memories, and sometimes of finding them. An examination of common parlance, therefore, suggests that there is general adherence to what might be called the spatial metaphor. The basic assumptions of this metaphor are that memories are treated as objects stored in specific locations within the mind, and the retrieval process involves a search through the mind in order to find specific memories....

   However, while the spatial metaphor has shown extraordinary longevity, there have been some interesting changes over time in the precise form of analogy used. In particular, technological advances have inﬂuenced theoretical conceptualisations.... The original Greek analogies were based on wax tablets and aviaries; these were superseded by analogies involving switchboards, gramophones, tape recorders, libraries, conveyor belts, and underground maps. Most recently, the workings of human memory have been compared to computer functioning... and it has been suggested that the various memory stores found in computers have their counterparts in the human memory system. (Eysenck, 1984, pp. 79-80)

    11) Comparison of Primary Memory and Secondary Memory

   Primary memory [as proposed by William James] relates to information that remains in consciousness after it has been perceived, and thus forms part of the psychological present, whereas secondary memory contains information about events that have left consciousness, and are therefore part of the psychological past. (Eysenck, 1984, p. 86)

    12) Semantic Memory and Episodic Memory

   Once psychologists began to study long-term memory per se, they realized it may be divided into two main categories.... Semantic memories have to do with our general knowledge about the working of the world. We know what cars do, what stoves do, what the laws of gravity are, and so on. Episodic memories are largely events that took place at a time and place in our personal history. Remembering specific events about our own actions, about our family, and about our individual past falls into this category. With amnesia or in aging, what dims... is our personal episodic memories, save for those that are especially dear or painful to us. Our knowledge of how the world works remains pretty much intact. (Gazzaniga, 1988, p. 42)

    13) The Relation of Memory to Thinking

   The nature of memory... provides a natural starting point for an analysis of thinking. Memory is the repository of many of the beliefs and representations that enter into thinking, and the retrievability of these representations can limit the quality of our thought. (Smith, 1990, p. 1)

Historical dictionary of quotations in cognitive science > Memory

См. также в других словарях:

Greek Primacy — is the view that the Christian New Testament and/or its sources were originally written in Koine Greek. It is generally accepted by most scholars today that the New Testament of the Bible was written primarily, if not completely, in Koine or… … Wikipedia

Greek language — Greek Ελληνικά Ellīniká Pronunciation [eliniˈka] Spoken in Greece, Cyprus … Wikipedia

Greek Church — • Details the history and various divisions of the church Catholic Encyclopedia. Kevin Knight. 2006. Greek Church Greek Church † … Catholic encyclopedia

Greek arithmetic, geometry and harmonics: Thales to Plato — Ian Mueller INTRODUCTION: PROCLUS’ HISTORY OF GEOMETRY In a famous passage in Book VII of the Republic starting at Socrates proposes to inquire about the studies (mathēmata) needed to train the young people who will become leaders of the ideal… … History of philosophy

Speak of the Devil — is an idiom or phrase used in both written and spoken English. It is used when an object of discussion (normally a person) unexpectedly becomes present during the conversation. For example, if Alice and Bob start discussing Charlie while he isn t … Wikipedia

Greek Orthodox Church in America — • The name Orthodox Church is generally used to distinguish those of the Greek Rite who are not in communion with the Holy See Catholic Encyclopedia. Kevin Knight. 2006. Greek Orthodox Church in America Greek Or … Catholic encyclopedia

Greek military junta of 1967–1974 — Regime of the Colonels redirects here. For the generic usage as a term for military rule, see military junta. For the Polish regime of colonels, see Piłsudski s colonels. For other uses, see Colonels regime. History of Greece … Wikipedia

Greek mythology — Bust of Zeus, Otricoli (Sala Rotonda, Museo Pio Clementino, Vatican) Topics in Greek mythology Gods … Wikipedia

Greek–Calabrian dialect — The Greek Calabrian dialect or Greek Bovesian is the version of Italian Greek used in Calabria, as opposed to the other Italian Greek dialect spoken in the Grecìa Salentina, remnant of the ancient and Byzantine Greek colonisation of the region.… … Wikipedia

Greek religion — Beliefs, rituals, and mythology of the ancient Greeks. Though the worship of the sky god Zeus began as early as the 2nd millennium BC, Greek religion in the established sense began с 750 BC and lasted for over a thousand years, extending its… … Universalium

Common English usage misconceptions — Text from Robert Louis Stevenson s Strange Case of Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde as it would appear in a professionally published edition in the United States today, featuring one sentence paragraphs, sentences beginning with the conjunctions but and and … Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

speak common Greek

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

speak common Greek

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: